kmmvj^ w^^^^'^^^^F^^^ vmrnm GIFT OF W. CARPENTIEl ' i Ht2.^5' n. WILLIAM R. HARPER'S:':..'".: ...: Elements of Hebrew BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD NEW AND REVISED EDITION BY J. M. POWIS SMITH, Ph.D. Professor of Old Testament Language and Literature m THE University of Chicago CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS NEW YORK CHICAGO BOSTON )1- COPTRIQHT, 1921, BT CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS THE SCRIBNER PRESS PREFACE HAiO The sixth edition of Harper's Elements of Hebrew appeared in 1885. Since that time it has served the needs of large numbers of students beginning the study of Hebrew, and has gained for itself a secure position among elementary text-books. But during the past thirty-five years much progress has been made in the study of Hebrew grammar, of which Harper's Elements remained unaware. The late President Harper himself was, of course, fully conscious of this, and frequently expressed his eagerness to bring out a new edi- tion of the Elements. The pressure of official duties, however, and his premature death denied him this privilege. The value of the Harper manner of approach to the study of He- brew has been so clearly demonstrated in the experience of successive generations of students that the perpetuation of the text-books in which it is embodied seems called for. To this end the present re- vision has been undertaken. Effort has been made to preserve the form and method of the original as far as possible. The changes in- corporated in the new edition are only such as seem demanded by the present status of our knowledge of Hebrew and Semitic grammar. The more important of these changes may be noted here. (1) The half-open syllable has been eliminated, as was suggested by Sievers (Metrische Studien, vol. I, p. 22), and approved by Gesenius- Kautzsch {Hebr. Grammatik, 28th ed., 1909). (2) A beginning has been made along the line of bringing Hebrew grammar into accord with the results of the modern study of phonetics. This involves some marked changes in the treatment of the Hebrew vowel-system; but it seems well to make this departure, even in a book for beginners, since beginners are entitled to protection from known errors; and further because many students in our best colleges are learning the newer phonetic principles and will welcome them as old friends when they find them in this new field. (3) A frank acceptance has been accorded the biliteral explanation of the so-called ^"J? and V'J? rv -I 4 i\ 4 4 PREFACE verbs and nouns. This point of view seems more nearly in accord- ance with the facts, and likewise makes the study of these forms simpler for beginners. The biliteral hypothesis has not been carried as far here as it might well be in a more advanced grammar, its appli- cation being confined to the more apparent cases, for the sake of sim- plicity. It remains to express my sense of obligation to two of my col- leagues. Professor Ira Maurice Price has read the work both in manuscript and in proof, and has done much to insure accuracy in printing. To Professor Martin Sprengling, who read the book in manuscript, I am especially grateful for numerous and valuable sug- gestions, the acceptance of which will, I trust, greatly increase the worth of the book. Its errors are my own; I cannot hope to have escaped error in the presentation of a subject beset with so much that is problematical. "To err is human; to forgive, divine I" I can hope only that the present edition may give a new lease of life to this work of my greatest teacher. J. M. Powis Smith. The University of Chicago, Jan. 1, 1921. PREFACE TO THE SIXTH EDITION The first edition of the Elements was issued in July, 1881; the second, in October, 1882; the third, in February, 1883; the fourth, in November, 1883; the fifth, in November, 1884. All these editions, the first excepted, were printed from one set of plates, with only such changes and additions, from time to time, as the use of the same plates would permit. The peculiar circumstances of publication ex- plained, although they could not excuse, the incomplete, and often imperfect, treatment accorded in these editions to very many of the subjects. While the present edition lays no claim to completeness, or to freedom from error, it will certainly be found more nearly com- plete and perfect than preceding editions. The author can only re- gret that regular and special duties of a most exacting nature, have not permitted him to give that amount of time, or that attention to the preparation of the book, which justice to the subject, to those who may use the book, and to himself, demanded. The present edition, which contains nearly one hundred additional pages, and is entirely re-written, differs considerably from the former editions, and radically from other grammars now in common use. Some of the distinguishing features of the grammar deserve, perhaps, special mention: 1) For the purpose, not of aiding the beginner to pronounce, but of teaching the exact force and value of the several consonant- and vowel-sounds, a minute system of transliteration has been employed, by which the attention of the student is directed from the very be- ginning to the details of the vowel-system. Too little, by far, is made in Hebrew study, of the vowel-system, without a correct knowl- edge of which all effort is merely groping in darkness. 2) A tolerably exhaustive treatment, more complete perhaps than any that has yet appeared in English, is given of the various vowel- sounds. Each sound is treated separately, the laws which regulate its occurrence and the grammatical forms in which it appears being carefully noted. 6 PREFACE 3) Certain important distinctions, not heretofore generally recog- nized by American teachers, are indicated throughout the grammar; e. g.y (a) the tone-long 6 (-7-), heightened from a, which is seen in Segholates, in H' / Imperfects and Participles, and elsewhere; (6) the naturally long e {^-rr) contracted from ay, which occurs in plural nouns before the pronominal suffixes "H, H? ^^^ ^^ certain Imper- fects before H^ J (c) the 6 obscured from a, as distinguished from the T 6 aw. 4) Instead of adopting a new Paradigm-word for each class of weak verbs, the verb 7 Op is retained, with such variation as the particular weak verb under consideration demanded; e. g., ^^"jj for the 'S guttural verb, ^JOp for the ^"i; verb, ^^Ip for the X)) verb. There can be no objection to this method. Many grammarians have adopted it in the treatment of noun-formation. Experience has shown that, in this way, men learn the verb more rapidly and more thoroughly. 5) In the treatment of the strong verb, the student is referred, in every case, to the primary form or ground-form from which the form in use has arisen in accordance with the phonetic laws of the lan- guage. That treatment which starts with stems having the form which occurs in the Perf. 3 m. sg., or Impf. 3 m. sg., is, at the same time, unscientific and unsatisfactory. The bugbear of Hebrew gram- mar is the weak verb. Nor will it be otherwise so long as the effort is made to explain the forms of weak verbs from those of the strong verb. How absurd, for example, to derive Q^p^ from a form like /COp^J but how simple to derive it from a form like ^CDD^> the )' ' 7 . ')'' ground-form of ^OD^* Together with the form in use, the student ii * should learn also the primary form from which the usual form is derived. This method will furnish a knowledge of the language, which will be not only more scientific, but also more lasting. 6) Particular attention is given to the subject of noun-formation, and on this is based the treatment of noun-inflection. The same method which would teach the primary forms of verbal stems, will also teach the primary forms of noun-stems. 7) That fiction of Hebrew grammarians, the connecting-vowel, has PREFACE 7 been practically discarded. The Hebrew has no connecting-vowels. The vowels incorrectly called connecting-vowels are the relics of old case- or stem-endings. These case- or stem-endings, summarily dis- posed of in current grammars under the head of "paragogic" vowels, are restored to the position which their existence and occurrence demand. But it is asked, What has a beginner to do with all this? Why should a grammar which proposes only to consider the "elements" of the language, take up these subjects? While this may do for specialists, of what service is it to him who studies Hebrew only for exegetical purposes ? Our reply is this : 1) The experiment of teaching men something about Hebrew gram- mar, of giving them only a superficial knowledge, has been tried for half a century; and it has failed. Men instructed in this manner take no interest in the study, learn little or nothing of the language, and forget, almost before it is learned, the little that they may have acquired. If for no other reason, the adoption of a new system is justified by the lamentable failure of the old to furnish any practical results. 2) Those who take up the study of Hebrew are men, not children. Why should they not learn, as they proceed, the explanation of this or that fact? Why should the student be told that the Infinitive Construct O^p) is formed from the Absolute (?^JOp) by reject- ing the pretonic qame? ? Is it not better that he should learn at once that the 6 of the Construct is from u, while the 6 of the Absolute is from a, and thus be enabled to grasp all the more firmly those two great phonetic laws of the language, heightening and obscuration? 3) The best way, always, to learn a thing is the right way, even if, at first, it is more difficult. If there is a difference between the 6 of the Imperfect, Imperative and Infinitive Construct on the one hand, and the 6 of the Infinitive Absolute and Participles on the other, what is gained by passing over it in silence? 4) In order to learn any subject, the student must be interested in that subject. Is he not more likely to be interested in an accurate, scientific treatment, than in an arbitrary, superficial treatment? The treatment adopted in the Elements is an inductive one, so 8 PREFACE far as it was possible to make it such. In the discussion of each sub- ject there are first given sufficient data, either in the way of words taken from the text, or of Paradigms, to form a basis for the work. The words cited are from the early chapters of Genesis, with which the student is supposed to be familiarizing himself, as the subjects are being taken up. Where these chapters furnished no suitable example, a word is taken from some other book, the chapter and verse being cited in each case. It is intended that the student shall feel in all his work that he is dealing with the actual facts of the language, and not with hypothetical forms. After the presentation of the "facts," the principles taught by these facts are stated as concisely as possible. While the book is an elementary treatise and, for this reason, does not aim to take up the exceptions and anomalies of the language, it will be found to contain a treatment of all that is essen- tial, and to include everything of importance which can be classified. In the treatment of the strong and weak verbs, a list is given under each class of the more important verbs belonging to this class. This list may be used as an exercise, or merely for handy reference. The author lays no claim to originality so far as concerns the ma- terial employed; there is indeed little room for originality in this line. In the matter, however, of arrangement, and of statement, he con- fidently believes that a kind of help is here afforded the student which cannot be found elsewhere. In the work of preparation, the best and latest authorities have been freely used. Special acknowledgment is due the grammars of Bickell, Gesenius (Kautzsch), and Davidson; but valuable aid has been received from those of Green, Nordheimer, Kalisch, Land, Ewald, Olshausen, Konig, Stade, and Bottcher. For his assistance in the preparation of the manuscript for the printer, and for many valuable suggestions, the author is indebted to Mr. Frederic J. Gurney, of Morgan Park. He desires also to express his thanks to Mr. C. E. Crandall, of Milton, Wis., for aid rendered by him in the verification of references and in the revision of the proof- sheets, and to Rev. John W. Payne, of Morgan Park, 111., for the skill and care exhibited in the typographical finish and accuracy of the book. He is under obligations, still further, to Professors C. R. PREFACE 9 Brown, of Newton Centre, S. Burnham, of Hamilton, E. L. Curtis, of Chicago, and F. B. Denio, of Bangor, for useful suggestions and corrections. It is generally conceded that in America we are on the eve of a great revival in the department of Semitic study. It is the author's hope that this volume may contribute something toward this greatly needed awakening. Trusting that the new edition may be received with the same favor as those which have preceded it, and that its shortcomings will be as far as possible overlooked, he places the book, although with many misgivings, in the hands of those who favor the Inductive Method. W. R. H. Morgan Park, III., Sept. 1, 1885. TABLE OF CONTENTS PART FIRST ORTHOGRAPHY. I. THE LETTERS. Sec. Page 1. Alphabet 17 2. Remarks on the Pronunciation of Letters 18 3. Remarks on the Forms of Letters 19 4. The Classification of Letters 19 II. VOWELS. 6. The Vowel-Signs 22 6. The Vowel-Letters 22 7. The Classification of the Vowel-Sounds 24 8. The Names of the Vowels 25 9. Simple and Compound ^*w, 26 10. Vocal S^wa 26 11. Silent Swa 27 III. OTHER POINTS. 12. Dageg-Lene 29 13. Dage-P6rte 30 14. Omission of Dage-F6rte. 30 15. Kinds of Dages-F5rte 31 16. MSppik and Raf6 31 17. Makt:ef 32 18. Mm 32 19. ?:r6 and KWv 33 IV. THE ACCENTS. 20. The Place of the Accent 35 21. Shifting of the Tone ' 36 22. The Table of Accents 36 23. Remarks on the Table of Accents 37 24. The Consecution of the more common Accents 38 25. A Table showing the Consecution of the Accents 40 V. SYLLABLES. 26. Kinds of Syllables 42 27. Syllabification , 42 28. Quantity of the Vowel in Syllables 43 VI. EUPHONY OF VOWELS. 29. Short Vowels 44 30. Naturally Long Vowels 46 31. Tone-Long Vowels 50 32. Reduced Vowels 52 33. The A-Class Vowels 54 34. The 1-Class Vowels 54 35. The U-Class Vowels 55 36. Changes of Vowels 55 37. Tables of Vowel-Changes 59 38. Pause 60 11 12 CONTENTS Sec. VII. EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. Page 39. Assimilation 62 40. Rejection 62 41. Addition, Transposition, Commutation 63 42. The Peculiarities of Laryngeals 64 43. The Weakness of n and n 66 44. The Weakness of i and ^ 67 PART SECOND ETYMOLOGY. VIII. INSEPARABLE PARTICLES. 45. The Article , 73 46. He Interrogative 74 47. The Inseparable Prepositions 74 48. The Preposition j p 75 49. Waw Conjimctive 76 IX. PRONOUNS. 50. The Personal Pronoun 77 51. Pronominal Suffixes 78 52. The Demonstrative Pronoun 80 63. The Relative Particle 80 54. The Interrogative Pronoun 81 X. THE VERB. 55. Roots 82 56. Classes of Verbs 82 57. Inflection 83 58. The Verb-Stems 84 XI. THE TRI-LITERAL VERB. A. The Strong Verb 87 59. General View of the Tri-Literal Verb-Stems 87 60. The If ai Perfect (Active) 88 61. The K:ai Perfect (Stative) 89 62. The Remaining Perfects 90 63. The 1^^\ Imperfect (Active) 91 64. The Kai Imperfect (Stative) 93 65. The Remaining Imperfects 94 66. The Imperatives 96 67. The Infinitives 98 68. The Participles 99 69. Special Forms of the Imperfect and Imperative 100 70. The Perfect and Imperfect with Waw Conversive 102 71. The Verb with Suffixes 104 72. General View of the Strong Verb 109 B. The Laryngeal Verb 110 73. Classes of Laryngeal Verbs 110 74. Verbs 'o Laryngeal Ill 75. Verbs 'p Larsmgeal 113 76. Verbs 'S Laryngeal 115 C. The Weak Verb 117 77. Classes of Weak Verbs 117 78. Verbs Pe Nfln (j'd) 118 79. Verbs Pe 'Algf (k'o) 120 80. Verbs Pe Waw (i'd) 121 81. Verbs Pe YOd (>'o) 123 82. Verbs /? or I'S.^caDed M'S 124 83. Verbs Lam6d 'Al6f (n'S) 128 CONTENTS 13 Sec XII. BI-LITERAL VERBS. Page 84. Classes of Bi-LIteral Verbs 130 85. The 'Ayin-Doubled Verb 131 86. The Middle- Vowel Verb 136 87. A Comparative View of the Verb Forms 142 XIII. NOUNS. 88. The Inflection of Noims 146 89. Nouns with One, Originally Short, Formative Vowel 146 90. Nouns with Two, Originally Short, Formative Vowels 148 91. Nouns with One Short and One Long Formative Vowel 149 92. Nouns with One Long and One Short Formative Vowel 150 93. Noims with the Second Radical RedupUcated 151 94. Nouns with the Third Radical Reduplicated 152 95. Noims with n and ^ Prefixed 152 96. Nouns with d Prefixed 153 97. The Signification of Nouns with a Prefixed 154 98. Nouns Formed by Prefixing n 155 99. Noims Formed by Means of Affixes 155 100. Noims from Bi-Literal Roots 156 101. Nouns Having Four or Five Radicals 159 102. Compound Nouns 159 103. Nouns Formed from Other Nouns 160 104. The Formation of Noun-Stems 160 105. The Formation of Cases 161 106. Affixes for Gender and Number 162 107. The Absolute and Construct States 163 108. The Pronominal Suffixes 165 109. Stem-Changes in the Infiection of Nouns 168 110. Classification of Noun-Stems 171 111. Nouns of the First Class 172 112. Nouns of the Second Class 176 113. Nouns of the Third Class 177 114. Nouns of the Fourth and Fifth Classes 179 115. Feminine Nouns 180 116. Irregular Nouns 183 117. Numerals 184 XIV. SEPARATE PARTICLES. 118. Adverbs 187 119. Prepositions 188 120. Conjunctions 189 121. Interjections 189 PARADIGMS. Paradigm A. The Personal Pronoun and Pronominal Suffixes 192-193 Paradigm B. The Strong Verb 194-195 Paradigm C. Strong Verb with Suffixes 196-197 Paradigm D. Verb Pe Co) Laryngeal 198 Paradigm E. Verb 'Ayin C>') Laryngeal 199 Paradigm F. ^Verb Lamed (S) Laryngeal 200 Paradigm G. ^Verb Pe Nfin (fa) 201 Paradigm H. Verb Pe 'Algf (k'd) . Verb Pe Y6d V'd) 202 Paradigm I. ^Verb Pe Waw O'd) 202-203 Paradigm K. ^Verb L^Sd He (n'h) 204-205 Paradigm L. Verb 'lyin Doubled (J?" V) 206-207 Paradigm M. Middle- Vowel Verbs (Vy and '"';?) 208-209 Paradigm N. Verb L^6d 'Algf (n'V) 210 INDEX. Of Subjects 211-218 PART FIRST-ORTHOGRAPHY I. The Letters 1. Alphabet Sign. Equiv- alent. Name. Num. Value. Sign. Equiv- alent. Name. Num. Value. 1 i< > 1-lef 1 12 b 1 L^-med 30 2 3 b Be^ 2 13 D m Mem 40 3 [3 1 (3 V g 1 Gi-mel ] 3 14 15 D n s Ndn Si-meX 50 60 4 1 d DUeB 4 16 V * 'A-yin 70 n d= ih in this] 17 B P Pe 80 5 n h H^ 5 [D f ] 6 1 w W&w 6 18 y ? i-dg 90 7 1 z Za-yin 7 19 P k l^ot 100 8 9 10 n 1 1^ X y Yod 8 9 10 20 21 -1 r RI5 ini gin 200 300 11 3 D k Kaf ] 20 22 n [n t e=^th T&w in cloth] 400 1. The Hebrew language has twenty-two letters; these are con- sonants and are written from right to left. 2. The vowels in the "names" of the letters, given above, are sounded according to the English equivalents given in 5. The "equivalents" for the consonants given above are rather to be re- garded as symbols suggestive of the characters they represent than as exact reproductions. 3. The equivalent of each sign is the initial letter of its name. 4. The six consonants written with a dot in them are also written without the dot; but then they are changed in pronunciation, viz., 2 = v; a = g; T = d; D = X; S = f; n = ^; see 12. 17 1^ ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 2 2. Remarks on the Pronunciation of Letters 1. n = 'e^ (1:1)'; ynS^n = li-re (1:1); D^i^^^ = Mo-him (1:1); Dlnn = ^'h6m(l:2). 2. ^]; = 'al (1:2); 2*1^ = '^-rev (1:5); ^"ip^^ = ra-ki(a)' (1 : 6). 3. im = 'e-Wd (1:5); TJC^n = ^5-% (1:2); nCrn.D = m^ra- liife^(l:2). 4. ^*Jp = ka-r&' (1 : 5); JS = ki (1:4); *^n2 = b5-ker (1 : 5). 5. 2lD = t6v (1:4); nHnp = mit-tiha^Vl : V); jCDj^n = hak- U'ton (1 : 16). 6. n^Ci^'><")2 = h^e'-m (1:1); E^^Jll^ way-yi-'as (1:7); TJ^fn = bo-sex (1:2). 7. YJ; = 'es (1 : 11); t^^^R = t6-se'(l : 12); ^lQ\ = yis-gor (2 : 21). 8. nii^l = w'e^ (1 : 1);' ^31 = wa-v6-hil (1:2); Hm = w'ru(a)ti a:2). 1- t*? ( ' ) is a laryngeal stop, made by bringing the edges of the larynx together, thus shutting off the emission of the breath; H 0^) is a "rough breathing," like h in how. 2. J/ ( * ) is a sound peculiar to the Semitic and made far down in the larynx; it is so difficult of utterance that no attempt is made to reproduce it here. 3. n (b) was a deep laryngeal; it is now generally pronounced like ch in the German Buck. 4. p (k) is a A:-sound, but pronounced farther back on the palate than 3 (k). 5* ED (t) is a dental sound made with the tip of the tongue higher up than in the pronunciation of p] (t)^. 6. f () is pronounced like the English sh; ^ (s) is an ordinary 5-sound, now indistinguishable from Q (s). 7. y (s) is a sharp hissing 5-sound; more emphatic than the ordi- nary D (s). 8. ) (w) is pronounced like w in water, and not like our v. 9. The spirant 3 (x) is pronounced like weak German ch in Kirche. 10. The spirant ^ (g) is pronounced like g in German Tage. 1 The chapter and verse in Genesis, in which a given word is found, are thus indi- cated; 1 : 1 meaning chapter 1, verse 1; 2 : 3 meaning chapter 2, verse 3, etc. In ordinary practice, :: and r\ are scarcely, if at all, to be distinguished. 4] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 19 * i ) 3 ^ 1 J 3, Remarks on the Forms of Letters 1- nMi D^DE^n njv o^nhx w"i3 n^E^j^?"i3 2. 13(1 D^i^i<(l:l) D1Dn(l:2) i:S(l:2)pJB (1:2) main (1:12) p3(l:4)[p|"lj;(l:20)[ y;;(l:ll) 3. D'lDDlS (1:16); mi3 (1:28), "iJS (1:2); Tj-nrj (3:24); nn\n (1:2), TjEfn (1:2); \T1 (1:3); p (1:4), J/nt (1:11); 31CD (1:4), D^O (1:2); nap^ (2:21), Qlt (1:5); Jlp"! (1:6), i ^i O) J~\) are extended. 2. Five letters Q, Q, J, S, y) have two forms; the second ("1, Q, |, P|, y) is used at the end of words. 3. Certain letters, very similar in form, are to be carefully dis- tinguished: 2. 3; a. J; 1. "I. T]; H. n. n; 1. *; 1. 1; CD. 0; D. D; V' a; t'- ' 4. The Classification of Letters Labials. Labio- Dentals. Dentals. Palatals. Velars. Laryngeals Stops 33 mD asp K Fricatives 1 DD 1 aD nnj; Nasals a , J Lateral ^ Rolled 1 2G ;;':,, elements of Hebrew [ 4 ' 'Hebrew woitls -ocmsist of consonants and vowels as in all other lan- guages. The use of the breath is fundamental in the production of these sounds. Vowels are produced by the relatively free, unob- structed emission of the breath, the modifications of vowel-sound being caused by varying positions of the vocal organs. Consonants, on the other hand, involve either a total or a partial obstruction of the breath. The Hebrew consonants, therefore, are classified on two bases: (1) the use of the breath in their production, (2) the vocal organs employed. 1. The first classification includes five groups of sounds: a. The Stops which involve a complete stoppage of the breath. b. The Fricatives produced by the friction of the breath escaping through some narrow passage. Remark. The Fricatives 2 X Hi !D D H ay ^or convenience be designated spirants. c. The Nasal sounds in which the breath is emitted through the nose. d. The Lateral sound (7 I) in which the breath escapes along openings on one or both sides of the tongue. e. The Rolled sound (*^ r) in which the tongue rapidly taps the teeth or the ridge of the teeth, thus successively obstructing and free- ing the passage of air. 2. The second classification, based on the organs of speech em- ployed, falls into six sub-divisions: a. The Labials proper involve the closing or partial closing of the lips. b. The Lahio'Dentals, a special variety of labials, are made by allowing the breath to escape with the front teeth placed upon the lower lip. c. The Dentals are made with the tip of the tongue touching, or in close proximity to, the front teeth. Of these some bring the tip of the tongue close to the front teeth, or in contact with them, while with others the contact or approach is a little farther back on the tongue. The difference between 2 and ^, p and {! ^ and J, B and B, "^ and *1, 2 and 2 is that in the stops the breath is fully checked, while in the spirants the breath is allowed a partial outlet. i 4] BY AN INDtJCTIV METHOD 21 d. The Palatal consonant (^ y) involves the approach toward the highest part of the palate of that part of the tongue which is opposite the top of the palate. e. The Velars involve contact between the tongue and the soft palate (velum). Of these p is made the farthest back. /. The Laryngeals involve action of the larynx which is not as yet clearly understood. Note 1. A third classification is generally recognized by stu- dents of phonetics: viz., voiced and unvoiced consonants. The former involve vibration of the vocal cords, the latter do not. Examples of voiced consonants are 2 1 ^^'^ o^ unvoiced, g, p^. But for further details of phonetics the student may refer to G. Noel-Arm- field. General Phonetics for Missionaries and Students of Languages (Cambridge: Heffer & Sons, 1915). II. Vowels 5. TTie Vozvel'Signs^ 1. 2, > K/, f> , na 1; K^'n, p, ^j;, on, nn, 2p 2. n^^. b^> %> ^V ^n, '^j; D^ p^ np, pp, d^ ^^: 3- 1 ';?' ^^: r?' I?' e^'> Yl> "^^^ na 2% np, nE^ 4. in, n, 11, 1\ 15t, 12, n; ^2, pb, Dn, p% ^^ 5. Din, D^ niK, ""^, ""n, ^fc^; ""^s;' D2;,"*tjx," 2^" 6.2, 1, \ S, n, !p; , j;; , K; p, H 1. -T- is pronounced as a in d// ; -=- like a in c/cw^. 2. ^ is pronounced as i in machine; -v- (i. e., without a following ''), as I in piw.* 3. "^ or is pronounced as ey in they; as ^ in met. 4. 1 is pronounced as oo in Tnoon ; -v as w in pu^^ 5. ^ or -=- is pronounced as o in note ; -r- practically the same as d in Ml, the same sign being used for both sounds. 6. a. -^- is a very quickly uttered sound, as e in below, when the word is pronounced rapidly, so as to slur over the e and run the b and / almost (but not quite) together; thus b'low, not below, nor blow; pHice, not police, nor plice. b. '=T (a combination of -=- and -r) is a little fuller in sound than -r, and with a slight a quality, c. -vT (a combination of -7- and -r) is a little fuller in sound than -r, and with a slight e quality. d. TT (a combination of -7- (6) and -7-) is a little fuller in sound than T-, and with a slight d or quality. 6. The Vowel-Letters Before the introduction^ of vowel-signs (5.), certain weak con- sonants, J^, n, 1, '', were sometimes used to indicate the vowel- sounds, and hence were called vowel-letters: All letters in Hebrew are consonants; the alphabet contains no vowels. To sup- ply the lack of vowels the above system of vowel-signs was introduced. * Sometimes __ is written where ___ was intended, and __ where i was intended; in such cases ___ is pronounced as ^__ (i in machine), and __ as i (oo in moon). These signs were introduced between the sixth and eighth centuries A. D. 22 6] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 23 1. Dp' = fe^am; ^n^^ = ^a-r^a (l : 2); n'^n = tay.y& (1 : 20). 2. inn = ^o-htl (1:2); nn = rii(a)b (1 : 2); Vfl = M-yii (1:15); m = '6t (1:3); y\Q = t6v (1:4); Q^ = yto (1 : 5). 3. U^nbi< = M6-htm (1 : 1); p^t^J^n = re^Si^ (1 : 1); ^^^bz^ = Hi-i (1 : 13); ^^Q = p'n6 (1:2); "^JE; = 'n6 (1 : 16); p2 = ben (1:4). 4. ^^^^ = yi^-y^ (l :29); nipD = mH:.wl (1 : 10); hSiK = '6h--16 (12 : 8). 1. The a-sound was indicated, when medial, by the laryngeal {<; when final, by the laryngeal H- Note 1. Medial a (^ or a) was indicated rarely; final k was generally, though not uniformly, indicated.^ Note 2. ^The letter {i^, when the final letter of a root, does not belong here; since, in this case, it is not a vowel-letter, but has merely lost its consonantal character. 2. The sounds ti and 6 were indicated by ). Note. ^Medial u and 6 were generally indicated; final H and 6 were always indicated. 3. The sounds i and e were indicated by ^. Note. Medial i and e were generally indicated; final 1 and 6 were always indicated. 4. The sounds e and 6, when final, were frequently indicated by Hr Note 1. Only long vowels were thus indicated, and, with but few exceptions, besides k, only the naturally long ( 30.) vowels. Note 2. ^Vowels indicated thus are said to be written fully; when not thus indicated, they are said to be written defectively. Note 3. Briefly stated, the use of the vowel-letters may thus be put: The vowels i and e, medial and final, are represented by ^. The vowels u and 6, medial and final, are represented by \ Final vowels, except i and ti, are represented by .... , H* Note 4. In the later books of the Old Testament the full writing is more common than in the earlier books, the tone-long vowels (31.) being often thus represented. Hos. 10 : 14. Cf. r^p (3 : 10) ; n'?3K (3 : 11). 24 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 7 7. The Classification of the VoweUSounds The primary vowel-sounds in Hebrew are represented by the three vowels a {-=-), i (-r-), and u (-v). Of these a is made with the widest opening of the vocal organs; i is made with a narrower opening and with the breath striking the front of the hard palate; ii is also made with a narrow opening, but farther back in the mouth, and with rounding of the lips. Closely related to the foregoing are five other sounds, viz., e (-?-), e (-:r-), i, ( T ), o (t^), and 5 ( ). Of these, e is midway between a and i, and may arise from either by deflection. Likewise ^ and 6 are midway between a and u, and are so closely alike as to be represented by the same sign; ^ comes from a under the influence of the tone by a rounding of the lips, while 6 comes from ii without tonal influence by a lowering of the back of the tongue, which produces a greater opening as for the a sounds this may also be designated as deflection. The remaining two vowels, e and 6, arise from i and ii, respectively, under the influence of the tone; each of them is made farther back on the palate than its corresponding short vowel. Hence we shall speak of e and 6 as lowered respectively from i and ii. In addition to these vowel-sounds, there are two other classes, viz., those made by lengthening the primary vowel-sounds and those made by redicdng them to their lowest terms. The naturally long vowels are of three classes, viz., (1) those arising from contraction, g. ^., S + w = 6; (2) those arising in compensation for the quiescence or loss of a consonant, e. g., in "^Di^^ the ^ has quiesced causing & to become &, which was then rounded to 6; (3) those which acquired their length in the eariiest stages of the language and are found as characteristic of certain formations, e. g., the 6 of the Jf al active participle which has been rounded from a. The reduced vowels are of two classes, viz., (1) the simple S'wa which is a neutral sound to which any one of the short vowels may be re- duced, and (2) the compound o*w4 which has a distinct form for each of the three short vowels, viz., -=r from a, -vt from i, and -tt from ii. The vowel-sounds, therefore, may be classified according to (1) 8] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 26 their organic fonnation, (2) their quantity, (3) their nature, (4) their value: 1. Classified according to their organic formation, they are: a. A-class, including the a-vowels and those derived from them. b. I-class, including the i-vowels and those derived from them. c. U-class, including the w-vowels and those derived from them. 2. Classified according to their quantity, they are: a-class. i-class. w-class. a. Short, -=- -=r- -t- -n- -^ -t-(6) b. Long, t- ^-^, ^-n- or -^, ^-r- 1> 1 or c. Reduced, -r -^ "i- -vt -r ^ft Note. ^The vowels -r- and -^ are sometimes called doubtful; because, not infrequently, they are the defective writing of a long vowel. 3. Classified according to their origin or nature, they are: a. Pure a; b. Deflected e from a; c. Attenuated i from a; d. Tone-Long a from a; e. Naturally Long. . . 6 from a; i; e from i; u. 6 from ii. e from i; i; e; 6 from u. ii. 6. e(=^_orn_) /. Reduced * and ; * and ; and . 4. Classified according to their value in inflection, they are: a. Changeable viz., (1) all short vowels not followed by a con- sonant in the same syllable; (2) tone-long; (3) reduced. b. Unchangeable viz., (1) short vowels followed by a consonant in the same syllable; (2) naturally long. Note. Changeable and unchangeable here apply only to changes of quantity, not of quality. 8, The Names of the Vowels The following table presents the arrangement of the vowel-sounds according to their quantity ( 7. d), and at the same time gives the technical name of eq,ch sound, 26 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [10 Class. Long. Short. Reduced. A-Class. a, a e Ktoes S^gol -=- a Pa^at e a Simple *wa Ijatef-Pa^at I-Class. i e,e Hirek er^ -T- 1 e Hirek Siol "vT e e Simple S'wa Pjatef-S'gol U-Class. u 6,6 gurek Holem T u o Ifibbtis s:ames-Hatiif -r e o Simple wa Hatef-?&me 9. Simple and Compound $'w6 1. ) originally ]; 2 originally 2; ^^j:)'] (1 : 15), but yip"! (1 : 6). 2. nE'X (1 : 7); "-^l^l (2 : 24) ; " D^^'b^? (1:1); DnJ?^'p(l l*): nnD^(2:23).'" 1. Simple *'wa (-r) is a neutral sound which may arise from any of the short vowels and represents the minimum of vowel-sound. (For transliteration and pronunciation see 5. /.) 2. Compound wa (-=r, -^, it) is a more audible sound than simple g*wa ( 5. 6. b. c. d), and is found, instead of simple S*wa, chiefly under laryngeals. Each of the three classes of vowels has its own distinctive compound *wa. 10, Vocal S'wd 1. n^c^xn? (1:1); Dinn (i:2); nn^-n (i:2); laTc^'i (^-^o)- 2. ^-|-1T = way-hi (1:3); ^p-^S = bir-ki(a)' (1:15); ^jx-^p = mii-'u (1:28); nr^? = bid-ga^ (1:28); ^D'^J = way-Xal (2:2); nn"?j; = 'ov-dah (2:15). 3. -2ry^ =yKz6v (2:24); nn"p^ = luko-hl (2 : 23); H^-y'^ =ya'MI(2:6). 1. Vocal *wa is always initial, i. e., it goes with the following vowel to form a syllable. 2. Certain forms in which g*wa seems to waver between two sylla- I 11] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 27 bles, and is consequently called medial by many grammarians, are to be treated as follows: a. Forms with wlw-conversive ( 70.), where the dages-forte has disappeared, were originally pronounced like way-yhi; but with the loss of the second yod the vocal wa also disappeared; hence such forms are better pronounced as way-hi, etc., ay being treated as a diphthong. h. Similarly S*wa is silent in such forms with prefixed preposi- tions as bir-ki(^)* and lim-'o-ro^ and in forms like mil-'ti. Note. This pronunciation is attested by such forms as 73^7^ and ^SE^H-^ That there was more or less variation in such cases, however, is clear from the variation in the use of d,ge-lene in spirants after such a Swd, from the fact that the Hebrew uses the same sign for a vocal *^a and a silent *wd, and from the testimony of the transliterations in the older strata of the Septuagint (11.). Cf, similar variations in spoken English, e. g., tol-e-ra-ble and tol-r^ble, con-side-ra-ble and con-sid-rble; ath-letic and ath-e-letic. c. In such forms as 31^^, etc., the *wa is only a helping vowel and does not affect the general situation; cf. the similar situa- tion in such forms as nH/E^*, where the coming in of pa^ah- : - J- T furtive does not increase the number of syllables. d. In forms with spirants after a so-called medial *wa, the absence of the d&ge is a survival from an earlier stage when a vowel-sound was heard before the spirant; cf. again Rn^C^*^ in which the presence of the later pa^ah-furtive does not change the older hard sound of the t 11. Silent S^wd 1. i^ljp^) = way-yik-r&' (1:5); bill'!) = way-yav-del (1:7); bn?P = mav-dil (1 : 6). 2. o. 1]Efn (1:4); l^lna (1:6); T^hnn (2:14). &. V\^ = 'att; nnj = na-0att; ph^D = ka-talt. Remark.-n''l^'t?n3 (1:1); pi (l':4); 2)lQ (1:4); Dl^ (1:5); D^e^Xn (2:10). >Jer. 51:49. ijsa. 47:2. 28 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [11 The simple S'wa (-j-), aside from its use to indicate a vowel-sound ( 9.), appears frequently where it has no sound. It occurs thus: 1. Under all consonants standing in the middle of a word and closing a syllable ( 26.). 2. Under a final letter, when that letter a. IsKaf; or b. Is a consonant containing Ddge-f6rte or lene, or preceded by another consonant with *wa. 3. Under an initial consonant in ^p[\lJ. Remark. Th6 weak letters ^, H, ), ^, when quiescent, or used as vowel-letters ( 6.), do not, of course, receive this silent S*wa. Note 1. wa under an initial consonant, whether of a word or of a syllable, is always vocal. Note 2. ^S*wa under a final consonant, whether of a word or of a syllable, is always silent. III. Other Points 12. D&ieS'Lene 1. n^E^'xna (1:1); nn\n (i:2); ^nsi a .-2); -nina (i:6); " : T ; IT J T ; ; "'JB-'Pi? (1:2); np 13 (1:29); lllp"! (2:21); ^"I'l^D (1:6). 2- ni"i2 = bid-gae (1 :'28); PIlDyb = i'"ov-d&h (2: 15).' 3- D^aa iD^aa (1:27); i^na napJI (1:27); Dl^3 ^3 (2:17): nn? n"! (1 : 28); |S 13 1^30 (3 : 3). 1. The letters 3* i> H* D S> II* have two sounds. Their hard sound (6, ^, (i, kf p, t) is indicated by a point called D^ge-lene, which they regularly receive whenever they do not immediately follow a vowel-sound. Note 1. As fricatives they are pronounced: ^ = v; T = d = th in those ; ^ =" fi^ fed (cf . ph in philosophy) ; J^ = = and *^. Note 1. When Dages-forte is omitted from a laryngeal and no compensation made for the loss by the strengthening of the preced- ing vowel, the Dages is said to be implied or understood. 1 The only exceptions to this statement are dk thou (f.), and nnj thou (f.) didst give. 16] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 31 Note 2. D&ge may be thus implied in H* H* ^^^ ^y but not in J^ and *^. Note 3. The syllable preceding a consonant in which D^ge- forte is thus implied is really a closed syllable. IS, Kinds of Ddie^-Fdrte 1. nnnp (i:7) m nnn-|p; ))^] a-^) m iipr; ^nn: (1:29) /or ^njni- ^D (3:22) /or irp-p; Hp; (2:21) /or^p.^^ 2. Efip^ (2:3); )^y (2:1); 'nVnnO (3:8); nXESH (4:7); 11J3(4:21). 3. nD-HE^;; (1 = 12); i^-nE^;?K (2: is); ni^rnnpb (2:23). : % ^ . V *%:.. T Jt:i-., 4. |3^n (17:17); ^rSaH (Ex. 2:3); E^npJO (Ex. 15:17). 5. !|Hn (Judg. 5:7); ^^m (Job 29 : 21); !|nai (Isa. 33 : 12). 6.r6i^ (2:4); Hsb (4:6)'; HIH (6:2); [nSnl- V J" TjT T J" T J" 1. When the doubling represents the combination of two similar, or the assimilation of two dissimilar consonants, the D^ge^-forte is called compensative. 2. When the doubling is characteristic of a grammatical form, the Dlge-f6rte is called characteristic. 3. When by its use the initial letter of a word is joined to the final vowel of a preceding word, the Dages-forte is called conjunctive. 4. When it is inserted in a consonant with S*wa, which is preceded by a short vowel, to make the *wa audible, the DIges-forte is called separative. 5. When the doubling strengthens or emphasizes the final tone- syllable of a section or verse, the D^ges-forte is called emphatic. 6. When the doubling gives greater firmness to the preceding vowel, the D^ges-forte is called firmative. 16. Mdppi^ and Rdf^ 1. nrp^ (1:24); nnn:;^ (2: 15); ny^pb (2:15); np^i6 (3:6); n^J? (3:6)5 n:;^! (3:15). 32 EtBMElfTS OF HEBKfiW ($ 18 2. U'>tb (1:6); r^H (1:26); nHp^ (2:23); }n3^nD1 (4:4); IT T - : T |t:... ) V : v ^nii'ini) (4:8). 1. Mappik (p^SP extender) is a point placed in final n* when this letter is used as a consonant, and not as a vowel-letter. Note. ^Mappik is written in MSS. also in {^/ ) and ^. 2. "RkU (nD*l ^^*0 IS a horizontal stroke placed over a letter, to T call particular attention to the absence of D,ge or Mappik. 17. M&^^ef 1. ^JS-^y (1:2); ^1K-^T (1:3); 2nr^Tl (1:5); ^'2'^V^^ (1:11). 2. n1n-n (1:4); ^*Dr^2 (1:21);.'T]3-Wo^. (3:16); inWDE^I (2:13).*^' T T ~ I" : 1. Makkef (HpD hinder) is a horizontal stroke placed between two words, to indicate that they are to be pronounced together and accented as if they formed but a single word. 2. If the former of two words, joined by Makkef, should contain a long vowel in a closed syllable ( 26. 2), such a vowel gives way to a short vowel, or receives Me^eg ( 18. 4). 18, Mieijt 1. n1-^T^ (1:3); v^'r^nn (i:7); nnn (i:9); o^DDton (1:16); D''j;2nt written) is the term applied to the pronuncia- ^ MQn&l^ ( " ) is sometimes substituted for M6dgg. 34 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 19 tion of a word that is called for by the consonants of the text as dis- tinguished from the vowels written with them. 2. ^f*re (^*lp, to be read) is the term applied to the pronunciation of a word called for by the vowels supplied by the Massoretes (the name applied to those students of the Hebrew text who established the traditional pronunciation represented by the present vocalization of the text). 3. Some words are always read otherwise than as they are written. These are said to have a "perpetual If *re.'* IV. The Accents 20, The Place of the Accent^ 1. n^E^Xn (1:1); Xna (1:1); D^DE^ (i:l); V^Hn (i:i); TjE^n (1:2). 2. n^E^K-) (1:1); QlpD (1:9); D^DE^ (1:1); D^ (i:6); nnn (i:9)- 3. n^E^Xn (1:1); 5<~I3 (1:1); ^^130 (1:6); H-)!?"' (2:23); TjSnnp (3:8). rp-1 (1:6); -inX (1:5); K-lpl (1:5); ^Dt<0(2:9); n^oan (3: is). 4. Y"1.{< (1:10); T]E^n (1:2); NE^T (1:11); ynE^ (1:20); pi; (2:8). inn (1:2); 3-1;? (1:6); 3E?3; (1:11); E^DJ (1:20); pX (2:12). 1. The accent or tone may rest on the ultima, in which case the word is called Milra'; or on the penult, in which case the word is called Mir el; but never on the antepenult. 2. So far as the syllabification of a word is concerned, a closed syllable with a long vowel, or an open syllable with a short vowel, is, as a rule, accented ( 28. 1. 2). 3. Uninflected words, and words receiving in inflection no endings, are accented on the ultima. 4. Nouns of the class called Segolates, which are really monosyllabic ( 89.), usually accent the characteristic vowel and not the helping vowel. Note 1. ^The place of the accent in inflected words, involving appendages, must be studied in connection with the subject of verbal and nominal inflection. 1 The place of the accent is indicated in this grammer by the the use of the accent -r*. Words which are not thus indicated are to be accented on the ultima. 35 36 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 22 Note 2. ^The term "accent" is used of the sign marking the syllable which receives the stress of voice; the term "tone" is used of the stress of voice. 21. Shifting of the Tone 1. n^^^ np (1:5); ne r\^v d-n); on^bsi^n (3:i9). 2. T\m (4 : 7), but r\m (3 : H); ""DJiJ (7 : 4), but ipj^ (4 : 9). 3. lOii'KlrS); n-)2^Va:22); -ia^'(2:7); Qp^l (4:8). V J- ) vjT :- V J-- |tjt- 4. n^Dxi (3:18); ^n"i3m (Ex. 3:20); inaim, in^am jT : - IT : J' : j* i : j* : - : (Ex. 6 : 6). 1. The tone is often shifted from the ultima to the penult of a word which is followed closely by a monosyllable, or by a dissyllable ac- cented upon the penult. 2. The tone is sometimes shifted in the case of words standing at the end of a clause or section, i. e., in pause ( 38.). 3. Wdw Conversive with the Imperfect usually causes shifting of the tone from the ultima to the penult when the latter is an open syllable ( 73.) and the former is closed. 4. Waw Conversive with the Perfect often causes shifting of the tone from the penult to the ultima ( 73.). 22. The Table of Accents 1. DISJUNCTIVES class I, Emperors 3. xnbiDS'goita X 4. rhifb\^ Maimed X 1. :p^^psmuk ,x 2. mnt^'A(9nab ^ Class 11. Kings 6. '?1naP]pTZaii:efgld6I... 7- Ji"'?"! R'^i(a)" K Class III. Duke 8. J^ 16. IIS Pizer ^ 17. rnQ 'jnD tfarn^ F^r^ . . ^ T : T : p 2. CONJUNCTIVES Class v. Servants 19. t^D-ipMerxa ^ 20. J^blSD JOID Merxa y/T : T : v rMia ^ 21. miaMtoab {^ 22. j^n^Darga i< ST : - s 23. NDlp ?adma K 24. T]SnO MahpaX 25. nJDp KE^i^n T'1K& if'tanna J< 26. lDl''"Dn")"'Ye'ral>ben V I : -r y6m6 J< 27. X^'KD M'ay-yW 23. Remarks on the Table of Accents 1. The "Accents" were designed to have a threefold use: a. To serve as musical notes in the cantillation of the Law and the Prophets in the synagogue; b. To indicate the tone-syllable {i. e., the syllable which is to be accented) of every word; c. To show the relation sustained by each word to the other words in a clause or sentence. 2. Every accent is used as a sign of interpunction ( 23. 1. c), to separate or join the several words of a sentence: a. Disjunctives (those numbered 1-18 in the Table) mark a sepa- ration. b. Conjunctives (those numbered 19-27 in the Table) mark a connection. 3. The Disjunctives vary in strength or power, and are accordingly divided into four ranks: Emperors, Kings, Dukes, Counts. 4. Those accents numbered 9 and 18 are pre-positive, i. e., written 1 Made up of MGna^i and PsH:. Used for M66g with words which have Snmfc: or 'Kdnhfy. 38 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 24 only on the first letter of a word, wherever the tone-syllable of that word may be. 5. Those accents numbered 3, 8, 12, 25 are postpositive, i. e., written only on the last letter of a word, wherever the tone-syllable of that word may be. 6. The post-positive accents are repeated whenever their word is accented on the Penult, or has Pa^ah-furtive ( 42. 2. d) under the last letter. 7. SiUdk may be distinguished from Me^eg ( 18.), Pat& from Ifadm^, and Y'^iv from MahpaX by their position. 24. The Consecution of the More Common Accents 1. :Y"ln Gen. 1:1. I V IT T 2. : Y"ln D^i^X Gen. 1 : 1. 3. :p rp^^ y^P'\n Gen. 1:7. : vixn-^;; nE^SDi D^i^ Gen. i : 28. I V IT T ^ T A-.. : : v: 1. Every verse (PIsAk) is separated from the verse following by the sign *, called Sof P^siik {end of the verse) ; while the last word of every verse has on its tone-syllable the accent -r, called Silluk, which, in form, is like M^^eg ( 18.). Note. Since Silliik always stands on the last tone-syllable of a verse, while Me^eg never stands on a tone-syllable, they are easily distinguished. 2. If the verse contain two primary sections, Silluk marks the end of the first, while the end of the second is indicated by -7-, 'A^n&lj. Note 1. In the study of the accentuation of a verse one must begin with Silltik, i, e., at the end of the verse. Note 2. These accents have only relative power. The pauses marked are logical pauses. 3. If the verse contain three primary sections, Silltik marks the end of the first; 'A^n^b, the end of the second; while the end of the third is indicated by -^, called S'golti. Note. ^For an explanation of the repetition of -^, see 23. 6. 34] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 39 4. : D^n D\n^x Dinn inav-Gen. 1:2 IT - v: A : T 5. a. rh^^n Hd."!^ WbWn . .Cen. 1 : 14. T :at - : -. : - t - 6- ne^3'n nn- D^"^b noK'V -Gen. 1 : 9. AT T - - TV V: V J - 6. : y-iNin Dpc^n D\rj!?x .... n^ic^x").? cen. 1 : 1. : Ti^nn -iin ato-is -iWn-nj<...Gen.i:4. ;.- IT A t T .D%-i^N. -DnN-Gen. 1:28.. . .njil. .. .E^mn. -Gen. 3:14. v: T T T - 4. When a primary section is large enough to be divided, or to con- tain a secondary section, the end of this secondary section, whether it stand in the primary section ruled by Silhik; or *A^nHi, is most frequently marked by , called ZHkef k^ton. 5. a. In secondary sections containing but a single word, where Zlkef t:^ton would have been expected, Z&kef g^dol, -^, is generally found instead. b. A secondary section of less importance than that which is indicated by Zikef k^ton is marked by , called R'vi(a)\ 6. The pause required by the rhythm before SflWlf and *A^n&h is marked by a disjunctive -7-, called Tift^; that before S'golti, by -^, called Z,rk,. Note. ^For the consecution of the remaining disjunctives see the Table of Consecution of Accents ( 25.)- 7. :Y"i.n m] (i:i); :Dpn ]^P'hv. (1=2); :T]E/nn'pni (i:4). 8. D^ribii 4^13 (1:1); Dinn ^js-^j; (i:2); A' v: jT T A : J" : - r\b''b K-ip (1:5). T :aT tJ JT 9. nt^-T n^E^;? ^3 (3 : 14); 'jan-?|in2 ne^x (3:3). 7. The Conjunctive accent which always accompanies SiUiil^ is -j-, called MerX^. 8. The Conjunctive accent which always accompanies ' A^n&t is -r-, called Mtin^t. 9. The Conjunctive accent which always accompanies S'g6lt& is likewise Mtin^t- 40 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [25 25. A Table Showing the Consecution of the Accents r ) or \ or P QP J J J V y or \ or p Qp or \ or P <5P q f y or \ or p p Q f y . __ __ or \ or P <5P REMARKS ON THE TABLE 1. The Consecution of SiUdk and *A^n^h, with the exception of the first conjunctive, is the same. 2. The third disjunctive preceding Silluk and *A0nah, the second preceding S'golt^ and Zikef k&ton, and the^r^^ preceding Rvi(a)' is Geres, after which the consecution is the same for all. 3. This Geres may be entirely omitted, in which case the servant of the preceding disjunctive will be present and will assume the func- tions of Geres. 4. After l^admS, the consecution may proceed either with T'lis^ ^f 'tannS, (and its Mun^h's) or, if there is a slight emphasis, with the disjunctive T'\M 6'd614 (and its Mun&h's). 5. Words standing between the T'lis^ Jf *tannl or the T'lis^ 6'd61a and the beginning of the section, will receive Mun&h if they are closely related, but Pizer if there is a great emphasis. Words standing be- tween P&zer and the beginning of the verse will receive Miin&h. Note. Instead of Munah, L'garmeh (t. e., Mtlnah with P*sik (It-)) is substituted if there is a slight emphasis on the word. 25] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 41 6. Instead of Pllzer, preceded by MAn&t* there may be substituted !lif arn^ F^r,, which is always preceded by Yeraji ben y6m6. Other words will have Mlln^t* Note 1. ^This table exhibits in general the features of the prose system. There are, however, many exceptions. The poetic system is entirely different. Note 2. A few accents, occurring but seldom, are omitted from the table. Note 3. This very brief treatment of the accent aims only to introduce the student to a subject, which demands much careful study and investigation for its mastery. Reference may be made to Wickes, A Treatise on the Accentuation of the Twenty-One so-called Prose Books of the Old Testament (1886) ; Idem, A Treatise on the Three so-called Poetical Books of the Old Testament, Psalms, Proverbs and Job (1881). V. Syllables 26. Kinds of Syllables 1. KV3(1:1); in"h(l:2); !in"3n (1:2); ''JB (1:2); ^T (1:3). 2. ^^T?? (1=6); p3 (1:4); 2l0 (1:4); j;n-]D (1:11); ^e^D^ (1 : 18). 1. Syllables which end in a vowel-sound are called open. 2. Syllables which end in a consonant are called closed. Note 1. A closed syllable whose final consonant is doubled is called sharpened. Note 2. ^What seems to be an unaccented open syllable, with a short vowel, is of frequent occurrence; this is commonly called a half-open syllable; but it is better treated as closed ( 10.). 27. Syllabification 1- |n-?-^n-p-1 (4:4); Jfip"! (1:20); -1E^{< (1:7). 2. la-l-2/^ (1:20); n"iE^-n3 (1:1); Wrtb^ (1:1); p^-l (1:4). 3. na^M. (9 : 21); -yV (l : 22) for TV;, '2'))),^ (1 : 5) for 2-lJ?. 1. A word contains as many syllables as it has vowels; but Pa^afe- furtive ( 42. 2. d), and S*wa do not fornji syllables. 2. Syllables must begin with a consonant, the only exception being the prefixed conjunction ^ ; they may begin with two consonants, the first always having under it a vocal S*wa.^ Remark. Syllables often occur which apparently begin with a S'wa. These are cases in which S'wa creeps in after a laryngeal as a transitional or liaison element linking the two syllables together and facilitating pronunciation of the laryngeal. The 'wa is better treated as belonging with the preceding laryngeal. There is a single exception to this remark, viz., >5y (Gtcn. 4 : 19) in which the 8*rft is silent. 42 28] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 43 3. Syllables may end in two consonants, but only when these are strong. The harshness resulting from this combination is generally avoided by the insertion of a helping vowel ( 36.). 28. Quantity of the Vozvel in Syllables 1. ^1X-n (1:4); brr2 (1:7); n^E^'-n2 (1:1); Kn2 (1:1); J T J- " . J* : T T nor D (1=2). 2. K-|-p'1 (1:5); HTpD (1:10); ^"30 (1:6); DX (1:1); 3. DpWn (1:1); nWvh (2:22); )m (2:24); Dj?M4 : 15). 4. (a), "qcfn-riati); (6). nt^i (1:26); (). rpn? (1:14); wVp (1:22); (<0. "J-ixi (18 : 12). I- 6. r\^2 (6:14); QIQ (1:6); 2T (1:22); -)W (19:4). 1. The vowel of an unaccented open syllable must be long. 2. The vowel of a closed syllable must be short, unless it has the tone; when it has the tone, it may be long. 3. The vowel of the sharpened syllable is short, unless it has the tone; it is pure, i. e., a, i, u, and not deflected, i. e., e or 6. 4. Short vowels are often found in what appear to be unaccented open syllables, and are often called half-open syllables; but they are better treated as closed syllables. For example in (a) digeS-forte is implied or understood, thus making the syllable closed; in (b) the la- ryngeal once had no vowel (cf. ^DD^ [2:9]; ^DX'' '; mW) and the S*wa is therefore only a secondary helping-element and does not affect the syllabification; in (c) the S'wa is to be treated as silent (c/. 10.); in {d) the laryngeal was once vocal and closed the syl- lable, and the short vowel persists even though the laryngeal has be- come quiescent (c/. 10.). 5. The vowel of an open accented syllable may be short. 1 1 K^s. 20 : 14. Isa. 61 : 10. VI. Euphony of Vowels' 29. Short Vowels 1. o. bl2\ (1:4); np2l (1:9); Q^Tp\ (1:10); .TH (1:20); "jryp (1 : 11)-' ' 6. -n;n (1:25); -Dni (2:12); |a (2:8); ^ji;-!? (1:7); r] (3:1). e.n'2^ (2:3); Upb (2:22); p21 (2:24); nS^ (3:23); noa^ (2:9). d. Dj;S (2:23); ni?^ (2:9); p (2:5); ^J^E^'H (3:13); nCDK/ (15:5); nn''2 (24:32). e. nE;i;j (1:26); 12];^ (2:5); hV (2:6); ^DXD (2:9). 2. o. nJin (1:29); 1BJ< (2:24); InE^K (2:24); 3T (1:22); 'pi (2:22). 5. Knp^ (1:5); ^^'0^ (1:18); TDDH (2:6); ^Bp]; inpDJ (3:5). J J: : 3. a. !lb^1 (2:1); D^STJ? (3:7); Hp"? (3:23); Dp^ (4:24); 1. The pure short a is found: o. In unaccented closed, or sharpened syllables; h. In the closed syllable with secondary accent of nouns in the construct state, and a few monosyllabic nouns and particles; c. In the accented closed syllable of many verbal forms. d. (1) As the accented characteristic vowel of laryngeal and ^'^J? Segolates (89.); (2) before the suffix ^J, and (3) sometimes before the locative ending H . Tliis treatment is not intended to be exhaustive; it will be found practically complete, however, so far as general principles are concerned. 44 29] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 45 e. In a closed syllable with Me^eg ( 18. 3) before a compound g'wa. 2. The pure short i is found: a. In unaccented closed, and especially sharpened, syllables, and in some accented open syllables ( 28. 5); but h. That i (-^) which comes by attenuation or thinning ( 36. 4) from an original a must be distinguished from an original i, al- though it is subject to the same rules as the latter. 3. The pure short ii is found almost exclusively in unaccented sharpened syllables. 4. -nK(l:4); 'nn2^1 (1 : 22) ; D2"H2:8); 2;iri(3:24); ) vjT : - V jT - vjT : - nbm(4:i). ?]12^n (1:2); 2|':S;.(l:n); n|:^. (2:18); 'yy>(X:22); j^^l (2:22). ion: (2:9); Vn^; 12^; [Wl]; DDT (9:2). T : V I vjv V V.' - v:iv v :v 5. -^3 (1:21); ^^"2^ (1:29); T\^^tO (3:21); naH") (6:15); T t:t :t t;t 6!Dj;5n]. mn;? (2 : 15); niDC^ (2 : 15); "^DK (3 : 11); -3]^ (2 = 24). Tit t:t T-: T^:t* 4. The short g-sound -v- (e), as a deflection from a or i, is found: a. In unaccented closed syllables in general. h. As an unaccented vowel in certain forms with wlw conver- sive. c. As a helping-vowel in Segolate nouns. d. As the characteristic accented vowel in Segolate forms. e. In unaccented closed syllables before laryngeals. Note 1. There is also to be noticed the character of the -?- which appears in certain particles, e. g., )J3, *1E^{<, etc., and pro- nominal forms (DOX; DO 5 \V\y D2' ]^)y ^6 origin of which is obscure. 5. The short o-sound -r- (6), deflected from and more common than -^ (u) and sustaining to -^ and -^ (o) the same relation that is sus- tained by -V- (e) to -r- (i) and -^ (e), is found in unaccented closed syllables. 46 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 30 30. Naturally Long Vowels 1. a. m (4 : 14) = na'; n^ (4 : 25) = m; 6p == kM]. T T ) T ^. D^3 = gannavi; jna^mattan*; 2n3 = k'^av3; a'lp^fe^'rav/^ c. D^^^^< (l : l) = **16him for 'lahim; ^^i^'^ (1:3) = y6'mer /or yfi'mer; V^J (1 : 16) = gSdol /or gSdal; ^3^ (2:16) = '&XSl/or'&xai. ' 2. o. ^T1 = ^T'! (1:6); -iy^J = n^11 (2:7); |E^11 = |lf">'; (2:21). 6. |ipi = y&mln5; "Jlpn = bisid'; HICfD ='maSt(a)lj.' " "llCD''p for -itep'; E^?.^''?.' d. n^E'i; (3: 13) /or n">E'][; (n:?;^); wv (3 = 17) /or tn^iia e. Tppn(2:5); DE'2bM3:21); T3n(3:ll); NIE^H (3:13); ^112n(l:18). / D"'pP (9:9); D"'E'n (6:16); 3. a. y(f^V\ (3:19); DIpV": Dip-" 6. irin = irin (1:2); iri2 = iri2 (i:2); iDin=nDin"; Dpin-" c. nn (3 : 14): on;; (3 : D; nnian (4 : 23); yrq (3 : m-, EfD1(12:5). Naturally long vowels have arisen either (1) from contraction of a vowel and semivowel {i. e., y or w)^ or (2) as the characteristic of certain nominal and verbal forms, or (3) in compensation. 1. Naturally long a (-?-, seldom {^ ), comparatively rare, is found: a. In certain forms of middle-vowel verbs ( 89.) of which it is characteristic. h. In certain nominal forms, of which it is characteristic ( 94, 95.). Ex. 22 : 1, 6, 7. Gen. 34:12; 2 Kgs. 11 : 18. Esth. 4 : 8. 2 Sam. 17: 11. 6 Gen. 13 : 9. Ps. 30 : 5. 1 Sam. 2 : 10. Gen. 19 : 28. Judg. 19 : 2. w Ex. 21 : 19. " Gen. 13 ; 17. "Ezra 3: 11. M Ex. 40 : 17. 30] BY AN DTDUCnVE METHOD 47 c. Naturally long a, in the great majority of instances, was rounded to 6 ( 30. 6). 2. Naturally long i (^ , sometimes ), is found: a. As the contraction of iy ( 83. /). b. In certain nominal forms of which it is characteristic ( 94.). c. In certain nominal forms in which it is compensative ( 95.). d. In certain H' / forms, before consonant-additions ( 85.). e. In Hif'il forms, in which e would naturally have been ex- pected. /. In certain forms of middle-vowel verbs. 3. Naturally long ti {), sometimes -r) is found: o. As characteristic of certain middle- vowel ^al forms ( 89.). h. As the contraction of uw, whenever the combination uw would be final; in certain YQ Hof'al forms ( 83.); and in cer- tain middle-vowel and J?"^ Hof'al forms, which seem to follow the analogy of V'S forms. c. As characteristic of certain nominal forms, including the J^&\ passive participle. 4. a. p2 (1:4); n""?'; D^rjf (3:6). b. 3ip"tp| (4:7) = ttlv from 3"'E)"'ri; np;rri (21:7) from c. riE'l? (6 : 14) = ''s&from ">E^J?; nipD (1 : 10) = nulfwg from d. ""n^Dn^; ^mv'; ^^'^>^*' ^'^- 'O^iv (3:ii)i- e. IJD (1:2) = p'nS from tJB; ^^^ (1 : 16); IJI); (3:7); IQI (4 : 10). / DDD"'OV''oDCD"'D; ?n''V'-om|n"'K; 1E^"'DV'-omnE^iD. T" t:-)t" ) t I - r ' r -. - 5. a. nTi;vP\'' n:"'32n'; nraon"; nr>>an"; nraran-" 6. rp^n (3 : 14); TI^SN (3 : 19); TJIJS (4:6); [iT'DID]- c. r\nm (2:5); n^y a-.ny. ncy^ (i8:25). 1 Gen. 12 : 15. Ex. 3 : 10. Deut. 3 : 21. Deut. 4 : 35. 1 Sam. 15 : 9. Gen. 49 : 24. ' Isa.- 26 : 7. Deut. 1 : 44. Ruth 1:9. M Gen. 37 : 7. "1 Sam. 3:11. i Zech. 13 : 7. 48 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 30 4. Naturally long e (written ^ , yet sometimes ___ and H ) comes from the contraction of ay or ai, and is found: a. In the inflection of V'j; Segolates ( 84.). h. In the Hif'il forms of verbs originally ^"Q. c. In the Imperative (2 m. sg.) of verbs H"/ ( 85.); and In the construct state of nouns ending in H (^) ( HO.). d. In n' / perfects before consonant additions ( 85.). e. In the plural construct ending of masc. nouns, H" / ( HO.). /. In the penult of a few nominal formations. Note. ^The told very frequently yields to i, especially in active perfects, 5. Besides , there is another naturally long ^-sound, which like- wise arises out of ay. It is written ^ and H and may, for the sake of distinction, be transliterated as e. It is found: a. In n''/ Imperfects and Imv's before the fem. plur. termina- tion nJ ( 85.); and, after the analogy of these forms, also as a T separating vowel in similar middle-vowel and ^^ forms. h. In the forms of plural nouns before the pronominal suffixes ?] and n ( in.). c. In the absolute forms of nouns from H' / roots and in the J^dX Impf. and the Participles of H' / verbs. 6. a. \>2V< (2 : 16) = '&X61 /or 'liXal; {^^'^ (2:10) = y6se', /or yase'; T E^DT (1 : 26) = r6mes for rames; D^lD (2 : 13) =s6vev for s&vev. h. ^"Q^^ (1:3) = y6'mer for y^'mer; [^^5*) = yiki:61 for yikMl]. \- i I c. D\i^N (l:l)="16Wm; -\\r\ (6:9); uh'W (3 = 22); U'ht (26:31). d. PjBlJ?^ (1 : 20) = y-6fef ; ')2'"l2f2n'; (2 : 25) = yWboSaSd. ""n'Opq (6:18); TJ-inTE^H (28:15); ">n2D'; HlVp/ 7. a. DV' (1 : 5); r]1n (1 : 6) = 06x [cf. Tjin]. h. F|Dn (4:2) = t6se; '\Th\n (5 : 4); ^"^^y 1 1 Sam. 22 : 22. > Nahum 1 : 14. * Isa. 18 : 2. 30] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 49 c. nn^ln (2:4); -i;;to (1:14). d. irp^ (1:11); \2 (1:11); mi (1:11); rJ^nS (12:8). J- t: it 8. pVa (9:13, 14, 16); Dl-)j;n (19:25, 29); nXin (1:9); I T T IV T V V r I" 6. Naturally long 6, for the most part written defectively, is in many cases only the rounding of a naturally long d ( 30. 1). This is the case: a. In the forms of the Infinitive Absolute ( 70. 1. h), and in the 5^1 Active Participle ( 71. 1. a). h. In the ^fal Imperfect of verbs {<"S ( 82.), and in the Nif'al of middle-vowel verbs ( 89.). c. In a large number of nominal formations ( 94, 95.). d.ln so-called Polel (or Po'el), and Hi^polel (or Hi^po'el) forms. e. In the separating vowel used before consonant terminations in the Perfects of ))")} and middle-vowel verbs ( 88, 89.). 7. There is, however, a second naturally long 6, which is the result of the contraction of au or aw. This is found: a. In a large number of monosyllabic nouns from middle-vowel stems. h. In the Nif'al and Hif'il of verbs originally f S ( 80. 3. h), c. In many YQ nominal formations ( 99, 101.). d. In the contraction of &h verbal forms (85, 86. 1. a); (3) in some Segolate nouns; c. In an open 2?^etone-syllable; always , except as indicated in 32. 2. d. In an open positone-syllable, (1) in the case of the pronominal ending p, and frequently the suffixes H and ^; (2) in the feminine plural termination HJ, and the locative T ending, p] {directive) ( 108.). t Deut. 19: 6. Ruth 1 : 3. 31] BI AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 61 2.a.[]pV, ^:ib; t^Tl; E'Dh (1:26); ri^n (2:14); 220 );j"T J" T J" T J" |j.. J.. (2:11); |ri"! (1:17); VSPi (4:12); jp) (4:42); J^^;; (4:16); 2p (20 : 15) ; 12/lp_"i (2:3); ^^^i (1:4); |32fi (3 : 24) ; J^ann^. (3:8); :] j?nnp (3:8); Ipl (19 : 4) ; 2j?;^ (3 : 15) ; ]^J2 (15:1); ^njS? (17:14); dJet (15:16); yj? (2:16); DE^ (2:11); n{<(l:l); pa:7); |3(4:25); 3^?;? (1 : H); -1|J? (2 : 18) ; -iBp (5 : 1) ; "la; (6:5); j-jj; (2 : 8). b- r\Dr\2 (1 : 24); H^DJ (1 : 27); HOTin (2 : 21); 32^ (Dt. 28 : 28) ; IJC^' (1:8); Ki:^_ (4 : 16) ; 2|2^) (4 : 16) for 3j2fi; i;T(4:i7)/<"-;;T: 3. a. bi^J2 (1:18); ^2^'' (2:2); "laD"' (2:21); injbp (32:11); "'n^P^, (30 : 8) ; DnJJ (25 : 30) ; p^^^^ i; ^3 (1 : 30). 6. !inn(l:2); !)n'3(l:2); :]E^n(l:2); -)p3(l:5); Qr\p (2 : 12). c. W\i go-r'(i^ TjipO'; T]13y 2. Tone-long , instead of short or , is found: a. In a closed tone-syllable; always, except in a few monosyllabic particles. Worthy of notice is its occurrence, (1) in the I^Cal Perfect of many stative verbs ( 64. 2), and in the ]Kal Active Participle ( 71. 1. a); (2) in the ^al Imperfect and Imperative of )^^ ( 81.), and of verbs originally YQ ( 83.); (3) in Nif'al, Pi'el, Hif'il and Hi^pa'el forms in which the i, whence e comes, was originally a ( 59. 1. b, 60. 1. 6); (4) in many monosyllabic and dissyllabic nominal formations; (5) in i-class Segolates ( 92.). b. In an open pretone (or ante-pretone) syllable, always instead of i, as, (1) in nominal formations; 1 Lev. 13 : 3. Ex. 12 : 39. Num. 22 : 6. < 2 Sam. 7 : 29. S2 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 33 (2) in the preformative of the l^al Impf. of I'B verbs ( 83. 2. a). 3. Tone-long -*- (6), instead of -^, is found: a. In a closed tone-syllable. Worthy of notice is its occurrence, (1) in the |fal Infinitive Construct, Imperative, and Imper- fect ( 66. R. 2); (2) in the Jfal Perfect of a few stative verbs ( 64. 3); (3) in a few nominal forms ( 93. 1. c); b. In an open tone-syllable, in w-class Segolates. c. In an open ^rdone-syllable. Note 1. ^Tone-long vowels are correctly written defectively; in the later language the incorrect full writing is frequent. Note 2. The tone-long vowel, arising from the rejection of D&ges-forte from a following laryngeal, is unchangeable. 32. Reduced Vowels 1. a. n^bl'li (1: 16) /rom ^n'!^; Hh^D (1 : 16) /rom ^l^'D; ^pl-^; from i^r^- 6. nn^p-y^^ for ur\''t;-^/, onari? ;/<" nnnrv- c. uvn (4 : 25) /or ij-|-n; "n'Ti^j^-ii' /or ?i"in'?K-a- 2. a. ^n^^ d :2) for nn\'-i; laiic^"' a :20) for iiahE:'^ nbn t:it jt-t :: * i ' :! (3 : 16) for n^H; HJnJ : 12) for n^Hi- J T : IT JT - T b. yipl (1:20) /rom ^^p"^; >:iS (1:2); iJKf (1:16); IDT (4:10). c- D"'pi?V (4 : 10) from pj?2; i;;;-ii (3 : 5) from y-jr rf. T]^Di< (2 : 17); DD^D^ (3:5); T|bp (3 : 10); T|jha (3 : 14); T]y-11 (3 : 15). Remark. 2 originally 2; 7 orig. 7; 2 orig. 2; 1 orig. ). 3. a. n"inX(3:17); D^lVx (1:1); Se/^ (1:7)"; HDnN (2:6): T -; v: V -: t t -: Ruth 1:8. * Ruth 2 : 16. Ruth 3 : 13. Ruth 1 : 2. 32] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 53 6- nnpb (2:23) for nni?^; ^^E^'; ma^Ji^n'; .-nyoa.* c. anil (2:12); ^nDH^I (1:18); HDE^I (27:26); "anpl.* A short vowel, or a tone-long vowel, gives way to *w&, either simple or compound, when it would stand in an open syllable at a distance from the tone. The change may be called reduction ( 36. 3). Reduced vowels are found: 1. In what would be the anf ^pr^ton^-syllable, a. In the inflection of nouns ( 36. 3. 6), b. Before the grave termination in the inflection of verbs ( 63 . R.4) . c. In many verbal forms to which a pronominal suffix is attached. 2. In what would be the pr^tone-syllable, a. In the inflection of verbs, before H 1 and ^ ( 36. 3. o). b. In the formation of the construct state of nouns (sg. and pL). c. In the nominal inflection of participial forms. d. Before the suffixes 71, DD ^^^ P' when attached to nouns and to certain verbal forms. Remark. In many particles which originally had __, there is found , but before the tone the original a often becomes (47, 5; 49. 4). 3. The simple wa (9. 1) may represent the vowel-sound of any class. But the compound *wa ( 9. 2) has three distinct forms, one for each class, and is found: a. Chiefly under laryngeal ( 42. 3). But sometimes also, b. Under a letter which is, or should be, doubled. c. Under a letter preceded by the prefix ^. Note 1. The 'wa under a laryngeal, if vocal, must be compound wa; since a simple S'wa standing under a laryngeal is always silent. Note 2. The Hatef S*g61 never appears anywhere but under laryngeals. Note 3. Simple *w& is always vocal (1) at the beginning of a word, (2) under a consonant with d&geS-forte, (3) after another S*wft, except in the case of a final consonant. *Zech. 4:12. a judg. 16 : 16. <2Kgs. 2:1. < =1^12^ (1:21); bjikn (2:16) 5< ^Dt^H (3:1) for I^Di^n; lal.E^^ (1:20); n^H 6< l-j^n (3:16); jh(T (for ^')ni)but imnn: (4:8); i::nn;:' (4 = 14). 6. QIJs'Li "IJB a:2); ^J^DI but i?1p-1 (1:20); ^13 &" Di^i3 (1:16); -l1D but n"1P (1:16); n|?2 6< 1-1 1:;2 (2:23). Deut.22:4. 66 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 36 In the formation of stems and the inflection of words, the follow- ing vowel-changes occur: 1. Tone-long vowels are found, a. Usually when in nouns an original short vowel comes under the tone, either in open or closed syllables. b. When a short vowel would stand in an open syllable before the tone. This is characteristic of nominal formations. c. When in verbs an originally ante-pretonic short vowel be- comes pretonic, in an open syllable. d. When a following weak consonant becomes quiescent. e. When an originally short vowel comes to stand in pause. Under such circumstances, a is usually rounded to &; i is lowered to e, and u to 6 (see 33-35.)- Note. Cf. German alle, but English dU. 2. Reduction is the process by which a vowel is minimized or com- pressed to its smallest proportions. Cf. heaven, pronounced hev*n, but Anglo-Saxon heofon; even, pronounced ev'n, but Anglo-Saxon efen and ehhan; also the initial a in America when pronounced quickly. This process takes place, a. When an ultimate -=- (a), -r- (i), or -^ (u) in the inflection of verbs loses the tone; as when personal terminations consisting of a vowel, or pronominal suffixes connected by a vowel, are added. b. When a penultimate vowel, in the inflection of nouns, no longer stands immediately before the tone, as in the formation of the con- struct state, when terminations of gender and number are appended, and when pronominal suffixes are added. Note 1. Herein consists the great difference between verbal and nominal inflection, that in verbal, the ultimate vowel, in nominal, the penultimate vowel is changed. Note 2. In some verbal forms, the vowel of whose ultima is un- changeable, the penultimate vowel is reduced. Note 3. In some nominal forms, the vowel of whose penultima is unchangeable, the ultimate vowel is reduced. Note 4. Only vowels standing in an open syllable may be re- duced. Naturally long vowels are never reduced. J 36] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 87 3. a. naK^I (2 : 2) originally '^\ ^">"!]3n but ^"""lan (1 : 18). h. 6Bp, hit b^\Th E^-np but Efripi (2:S); r\2' but "102-' .c. Tl-imb""; DD01 (9:5) /or D301; nni (24: 30) /or 4. a. lyen^ nbx a =29) /or nbi<; 6c2pn /or ^epni I & ib^^jor b^T.' ^25j?j /or 'pipy:; b''^)}r\ m bipvn]- c. V-IX (1:24); 2")^ (1:5); E;Dn (1:24); Dm (20:18). 5. m (^CDDle^ Aom icdde'. 8. a. j;ip-l3 (1 : 14); mXO^ (1 : 15); n^"13 (1 : 26). Wn=lDp (1 :26); nbx|? (1 : 22) /or ibx); 12}}^ (2:5); nn2.' t: it I ^- i^IlI! (4 : 8) /9r innH^ [n^Q:w V n^Bj^Ji- 9. a. 2"-|i; (1:5); y-)7 (1:11); Di?B (2:23); n"!,? (19:4); !|n3 (1:2). b- ncnno (i:2) /or nsnio; h^e^dd (i:16) /or ri^2;po. c. E^y'T (I: 7) /or E^^l; 3T (1:22) /or 3-|l; p"! (2:22) for :3r Ex. 2 : 1. * Ruth 2:8. Ps. 2 : 7. Ps. 1 : 2. Ezek. 20 : 5. 68 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 36 3. Attenuation is a thinning of -=- (a) to -r- (i). It is the same change as that seen in sang, sing ; tango, attingo ; and in master which becomes mister, when used as a proclitic title {cf. Oxford Dictionary, s. V. Mr,). It takes place, a. In closed syllables containing preformatives: as in the Kal Imperfect, the Nif'al and Hif'il Perfects. h. In sharpened syllables: as in the Pi'el Perfect, and various nominal formations. c. In closed syllables which have lost the tone, especially in the construct plural of nouns and before grave suffixes. 4. Deflection involves a change of quality in vowels, whereby a becomes e, i becomes e, and ii becomes 6. The same change is seen in the Greek and Latin forms, mihi and meiLS, hulhus and ^oX^o^iy nummus and vofio^. It often takes place, a. When they would stand in an unaccented closed syllable. h. When they would stand before a laryngeal with wa. c. When a stands as the original vowel of a Segolate form. 5. Original short vowels usually stand unchanged in sharpened syllables. 6. Lengthening (or contraction) takes place, a. When two similar vowels, generally by the dropping of a consonant, come together. h. When a vowel and a semi-vowel come together; \heni-\-y=\, u-^-w^. c. When a or ^ is followed by i or y, or by ii or w; then a+i or 2/=e, a-\-u or w6. d. As characteristic of certain verbal and nominal forms. 7. Rounding is a process applied not only in producing - from a, but also in changing the vowel a to 6. The same change is seen in the Anglo-Saxon ham, hame, or haam becoming home ; stan, becoming stone. 8. A vocal S^wa must always be followed by a full vowel, rather than by another ^wa. Hence: a. At the beginning of a word, an original short vowel, that ordinarily is reduced to *wa, will remain without reduction if followed by a S*wa, yielding only to such attenuation or deflection as may be 37] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 69 necessary; a is commonly attenuated to i, but if the S*wS, is com- pound, the short vowel is assimilated to it. b. In the middle of a word, where a compound S*wa stands as helping-vowel under a laryngeal, when inflectional change brings a vocal *wa immediately after the compound S^wa, the latter in every case gives place to the corresponding short vowel (or a deflection of it) as helping- vowel. 9. When two vowelless consonants would come together at the end of a word, a helping-vowel is usually inserted between them to aid in pronunciation. The helping-vowel practically constitutes a new syllable, but the nature of the vowel treatment in many cases shows that the new syllable was not fully recognized (c/. 27.). This helping-vowel is generally e, but with a laryngeal it is usually a, with ^ it is i, and with ) it is generally u. The most common instances of this are: a. The large class of nouns called Segolates ( 92.). h. A class of feminine formations resembling Segolates. c. Certain short verbal forms ( 85. /). Note. The use of a helping-vowel is common in carelessly spoken English; e. g., elm becomes ellum; prism=' prisum ; film= fillum; Henry=Henery; athletic = atheletic, etc. 37. Tables of Vowel-Changes The following tables summarize the various possible vowel-changes: TABLE I i-\-i or t+2/ = i a-f-2/ = ay a-\-i or a-\-y = ^ a-\-y = e a-\-a = o a-\-a = a a-\-w = aw a+w or a-\-w = 6 u-\-u or u-\-w = ^ 60 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW (38 TABLE II original a attenuated to i which then is treated ^^ like an original i original a retained as a ^^'^^^^^^ original a rounded to & original a deflected to e original a reduced to original a reduced to fi original i deflected to e I original i retained as i t-^ -S original i lowered to e original i reduced to original i reduced to 6 original u deflected to 6 original u retained as , u M^ 5 original u lowered to 6 original u reduced to original u reduced to 38. Pause 1. Wp2n\ (2:25); )m^i (7:11); rp):i^2 (3:17); ?[ni^X (3:17). 2. D^Sn(l:2); n^^^ (1:5); n^DX(3:ll); nOaM2:5); y^] IT T :at t : it t at : ~at (1:29) /or;;-)! (=^1]): ban (4:2) /or ^3n ( = ^3n). 3. nn (3: 11) /or nn; ""DiX (3 :10) /or 13 j. T AT JT - J T J* IT 4. n^On (2:17); hut riD"! (11:28); and plb'^l (5:5, 8, 11, 14, 17, T T or (3) after the preposition 7. Note. Assimilation is indicated by a Dages-forte in the following ) consonant, which, however, is rejected from final consonants ( 14. 1). 40, Rejection 1- a. nn(J) (4:12); nn|'p6) (4:11); -^^fd) (19:9); mt^i}) (4:7). b. n?b(^) (11:31); nVlO) (2:9); }310) (20:7); n-!^(^) (4:2). 1 Num. 7 : 89. 2 Isa. 44 : 3. Ex. 25 : 8. * Num. 14 : 3. 62 41] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 63 c. IJnj (42: 11) for !|:nj>^; ^3X' probably for ^3a. 2. 11^5^ (1:5) /or ']'\mb; ^2^ (1:7) /or H>T.- 3. inp^J^ (42:20) 6( pniDP (3:3); ^iri (2: 10) /or llfj. The consonants most liable to rejection are the laryngeals J^ and n, the dentals 7 and J, and the vowel-letters ) and ^. These are often rejected: 1. From the beginning of a word when there is no vowel beneath to sustain them, a. In the case of J of verbs V'Q ( 81.) and of 7 in Hn^ in the K^al Imv. and Infinitive Construct. b. In the case of T or ^ of verbs YQ in the same forms. c. In a few isolated cases. 2. From the middle of a word when preceded only by a 'w&. 3. From the end of a word, by ordinary attrition, as in the case of ) of the plural ending )']; and of a final ^ in verbs H"!? ( 85.). Note 1. On the rejection of J5 and n> see also 43. Note 2. On the rejection of T and ^, see also 44. 41. Addition, Transposition, Commutation 1. ^_1-|f and j;;1-|i{1E':;'Vo01E':;- 1. The addition of a letter sometimes takes place at the beginning of a word to avoid harshness in pronunciation, as in the case of ^, called prosthetic, when used in the formation of nouns. 2. The transposition of letters, of frequent occurrence in the prov- ince of the lexicon, occurs in the grammar only in the case of p of the Hi^pa'el of verbs when it would stand before a sibilant fricative. 1 Ex. 3 : 2. 2 Ex. 6:6. ' Jer. 32 : 21. * Lev. 2 : 2. 6 Gen. 14 : 13. Deut. 23 : 19. Mic. 6 : 16. Gen. 22 : 6. Gen. 44 : 16. w Josh. 9 : 12. " Ruth 4:7. Ex. 3 : 16. 64 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 42 3. The commutation of letters, of frequent occurrence in the prov- ince of the lexicon, occurs in the grammar in the case of a. n ^^^ EO in the Hi^pa'el stem. h. ) and "i in YQ, middle-vowel and n"^ forms (see 44. 1. a e). 42, The Peculiarities of Laryngeals 1. a. rjirnn (1:7); HDIXn (1 = 25); T^'^n (1:22); nini '^ I T IT T T -: IT I '^ T V Tl" J (1:9). 6. nsrn.o(i:2); xinn (2:12); n'nn (i:2i); r\pnnix-A); 2. o. N-i;n_ (1:4); rb^^ (2:6); i^^) (2:5); HC'^J (1:26); -njj?1(2:24).' ' 6. nS: (2:7); ^^5^ (2:8); nm\{2:9i; ^T (4:25); [nC)p]. c. iDn: (2:9); pm"! (41:56); ^nn'; "i:m2;;n-' d. nn (1:2); yipn (1:6); j;nip (1:11); ;;-l_t (1:29); ^p'\ (1:15). 3. a. n^J<5^'/roS&'al&; ^i^X (1:1) /'<"" 'Hah; ''Vn*/'-OTO toll. T -; IT v: t: I. iaj; (2:5); niE'i; (2:4); nbK (1:22); PIVH (2:18); c/. n;ini(i2:2). HE'W (1:26); H V (2:6); HE'yX (2:18); rt^yQ'; 6D]?n]. V ^:i- V ^: I- V ^-i IV ; ^: it - ^:it Remark8.-ri32/"'. (2:2) 6< -21,S;M2:24); IDHJ (2:9); imniT /<" iniSn"' (4:8); TiD^n' "<* rnD;/n'6" mD:s?ni"' J" :-:- d' ^:iv r :j-^:iv jt : -'^ti- : The laryngeals, in the order of their strength beginning with the weakest, are t^, y, H* H- 1 shares some of their characteristics. They have the following peculiarities: 1. They refuse to be doubled (i. e., to receive DigeS-forte). But here a distinction must be made between, a. i^ and *^, which entirely reject the doubling, and require a strengthening of the preceding vowel ( 36. 2. 6); and Deut. 23 : 23. Isa. 43 : 24. Ex. 3 : 22. Deut. 28 : 61. Ruth 2: 12. Niim. 5 : 18, 30. ' Ps. 31 : 9. Num. 3 : 6; 8 : la 42] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 65 ^' J/> n* ^^^ n of which y sometimes, H and H nearly al- ways, receive a so-called D^ge-f6rte implied, and allow a preceding vowel to remain short. 2. They take, particularly before them, the a-vowels; hence, o. The vowel -=- (a) is chosen instead of -r- (i) or -5- (e), es- pecially when a was the original vowel. b. The vowel -^ (a) is chosen instead of -^ (e) or ~ (6), es- pecially when a was a collateral form. c. The vowel -7- (e), arising by deflection from S, is chosen for the sake of dissimilarity. d. The vowel -=- steals in between a heterogeneous long vowel and a final laryngeal as an aid in pronunciation. This -=- is called Pa^alj- furtive; it is a mere transition-sound and does not make a syllable. It disappears when the laryngeal ceases to be final. Note 1. The letter "^ (1) does not receive D&ge-f6rte, and (2) often shows a preference for -^, and is consequently frequently classed for convenience with the laryngeals. Note 2. A final {< is not a consonant, nor is final n* unless it contain M&pp% ( 16. 1). 3. They have a decided preference for compound S*wa. Hence there is found under laryngeals, a. A compound *wa, rather than a simple S'wd, in the place of an original vowel; and in this case the compound S'wa of the class to which the original vowel belonged, is used. h. An inserted compound 'w& for facilitating the pronunciation; and here, (1) an initial laryngeal takes -=r, except in the case of {<, and of n and n in the verbs n^H and n^H* which prefer -rj-; (2) a medial laryngeal takes that wa which corresponds to the preceding vowel. Remark 1. ^Thus where in strong forms there is found a silent S*w&, in laryngeal forms there is usually found a compound S'wa as a helping-vowel, which does not affect the syllabification. Remark 2. ^Under the strong laryngeals, especially H* the use 66 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 43 of the compound S*wa for the facilitation of pronunciation is not so general. Remark 3. ^When a compound 'wa would stand before a sim- ple 'wa, the former always gives way to a vowel ( 36.). Remark 4. The combination -^r tt often yields to -^ -p-, when removed to a distance from the tone. 43. The Weakness of i^ and H 1. a, K-J3 (1:1); ^^nj^n (1:5); J^yln (1:24). h. n^^n (1:1) for r\^p^y D"'2/Xn (2:10) for U'^p^y. n1p^ (15:10) /or HX^pj?; ^DK^ (1:22) /or nb); D%i^K3 (3:5) /or D%i^X3; ^m^ (1:3) /or ^^H\ Remarks.-K-1'il (1:4); Qn>; ^DK (3: 12) /or ^P; n^Ef^' for n''E'-i.. 2. a. -|lN5>a:5)/ornlKn^; "qS^n^ (1:5) /or "^E^nH^; Dl^3 (1^8). 6- ^1T (1:7) /or ^"IDiT; HXin (1:9) /or nj^inn. c. irp^ (1:11) /or inrp^; 13 (1:11) /or !|n3; In'K (2:3) /or^ni^lK. The letters 5<5 and H* being exceedingly weak, not only occasion change, but likewise suffer change: 1. t^ loses its consonantal power and is said to quiesce or to be silent, a. Always, when it stands at the end of a word; here belong all forms of a ^'^^ character. h. Often, when it stands in the middle of a word; then, (1) a preceding vowelless consonant receives its vowel; (2) or, it loses its compound S*wa after a preceding vowel. The S'w4 disappears as soon as ^ quiesces and the pre- ceding short vowel is strengthened in compensation for the loss of the {<. Remark 1. A final J^, preceded by a simple S*w& is otiose. Deut. 16 : 9. Deut. 11 : 12. 44] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 67 Remark 2. ^A quiescent X is frequently elided from the middle of a word. 2. The consonant H at the end of a word is always distinguished from the vowel-letter H by the presence of a Mappik ( 16. 1). But on account of its weakness it is often entirely lost, o. In the case of the article after an inseparable preposition ( 47. 4). b. In Hif'il, Hof'al and Hi^pa'el verbal forms after a preforma- tive of gender or person. c. From between two vowels, which then contract. Note. ^The H of r\/ verbs and nouns ( 85.) is always a vowel-letter and has no connection with the H here considered. 44. The Weakness of ) and '^ 1. a. 1^^ (4:23) for ^h) {of, ^^1 11:30); yjj^ [c/. 22^^ (4:16)] V JV VJV T T - T V J" - T h. Dup': n^^n?' ^ of. j;^inn (45:i). d. |E?"i^ (2:21) /or |e?V; lif^. (2:7) for -|aV- 2. a. r\'!r}. (3:22) /or ^11; J^Ji (8:16) for i^yl; {<eu(. 8:13. 68 ELEMENTS OF HEBBEW [ 44 c. Whenever it is retained as the third radical in verbs H" A both when final and when medial ( 85. 3). d. When it would follow i in a closed syllable, as in the ^f al Im- perfect of verbs YQ which have a ^"Q treatment ( 83.)' 2. Elision takes place, a. Of an initial ) when supported only by S*wa, as in certain YQ Infs Construct and Imv's ( 83.); and also when in the ^fal Impf. the ), following i, does not go over to ^, according tol. d above. 6. Of a final ) and ^ in verbs called H' /* ^^ original vowel fol- lowing them having been previously lost; in this case the vowel pre- ceding, nearly always a, is rounded to ^ in Perfects, and becomes S in Imperfects and Participles (see for details, 85.). 3. o. VnlJ (41:21); i^alH (1:") M Xairi; a"iE)"'n (4:7) for nrl'i^n'; T]"'^^n (3: 14) /or bay-ySy-ka; ?jlBK (3:19). 6. npV. (6:14) =''s/or l^^j I^Q (1:2) =pn6 /or "IJS. c. lD)n' for lD)n: jE^I^ (.2:21) for p^^ = pT; "ly^"; (2:7) for "la-il. 4. a. p!) (1:4); !|t^^p!| (1:22); nlpD^I (1:10); nDpJI (1:27). b. !inn (1:2) /or inn; inn?': ds : 2) /or inne': (ninn?':).' c. V:^:3r2^Vform^T\-; VSX (2:7) /or m^SX; VJS5 (4:5). 5. a. n^l (4:26); ^Ti (4:1); n^l (4:18); "Ufl (2:8); Up'" (1:9); ln'31 (1:2). ^- "^It^i^^; ^lil^; see also the cases under 4. c, above. e. nbr (4:18); niH (3:20); ^T\)b^-' T T - : J- T 3. Contraction takes place, a. Of vowelless T or ^ with a preceding &, as (1) in the V'B Nif'al and Hif'il ( 83.), and the "^'Q ffif'il (84.2); 1 Deut. 1 : 44. Ezra 3 : 11. > In these cases a helping is inserted (i 39. m). * Deut. 1 : 17. Ex. 3 ; 16. ^ Deut. 4:7. Job 3 : 26. { 44j BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 69 (2) before nJ in H*'/ Imperfects and Imv's, and before ?J and n 111 plural of nouns ( 30. 5); here ay gives ^__ (^). 5. Of final T or *! with a preceding a, in forms that are closely tied to the following word, as (1) in the Imperative of verbs n"/ ( 85. 1./); (2) in the Construct plural ending ^__ {=ay)(% 111. 3. 6). c. Of 1 or ^ with a preceding w or i respectively, when a con- sonant follows, as in the X'Q Hoph'al ( 83. 3. c), and in the ^al Impf. of VB and ^''B verbs. 4. Vocalization qf)to) takes place, a. At the beginning of a word in the case of the conjunction ) ( 49. 2). b. At the end of a word, whenever ) would be preceded by a consonant, as (1) in the case of r\'b (or Y^) Segolates ( 92. 2. c); (2) in certain short forms of the imperfect. But c. The reverse takes place, viz., change of ) to ), especially in the case of the suflSx J|n* when it is attached (1) to verbal forms ending in a vowel, and (2) to the plural ending used before suffixes, viz., *'.^, of which, however, the ^ is lost (being only orthographically retained), and the a rounded to ^ ( 111.) as an assimila- tion to the ). 5. The consonantal force of ^ or "^ is retained, a. When as radicals they stand at the beginning of syllables. b. When a heterogeneous vowel, except a, precedes. c. When they would receive D&geS-forte ( 83.), and in a few exceptional cases. PART SECOND-ETYMOLOGY VIII. Inseparable Particles 45. The Article 1. D^ot^n (1:1); D^sn (1:2); ^E?'3^^ (i:9); D1^^ (i:i4); j-T- 'IT- TT 2. T]2/nn (1:4); .THn (1:21); J^lnn (2:12); rj^HH (2:14). 3. yn^jn (1:1); 3;^p"]n (1:7); r^^^ri (1:22). 4. inn'; pinn'; onnn'; ]\^n-* T T IV T IV I ^ IV Remark i.-nn^:iDn' for rii^-W' ^nJi<^^' ^n^nx^^. Remark Z-yni^n (1:1) /or yn^StH; "inH^or ^(111; D^H' /or Dj;n. Remark 3.-nlJ<^ (1:5) for nlJ^H + b; 'T]a^n^ (1:5) /or ^nn + b- 1. The usual form of the Article is (^ with a D^ges-forte in the following letter f^ 2. Before the strong laryngeals H ^i^^l H which may be doubled by implication ( 42. 1. 6), it is PI 3. Before the weak laryngeal ^ and before *^, and generally before y, which cannot be doubled ( 42. 1. a), -=- is rounded to ~ r? 4. Before T], and before an unaccented H, V, the -^^ is de- T T 't fleeted to -7- (e) for the sake of dissimilarity p| Remark 1. ^The D&ges-forte of the Article may of course be omitted from vowelless consonants ( 14. 2). Remark 2. ^The words for earth, mountain, people irregularly change their vowel after the Article. Remark 3. ^The H oi the Article is elided after the prepositions 3> 3> / ( 43. 2. a) and the vowel is given to the preposition. 1 1 Kgs. 8 : 65. Num. 13 : 18. Gen. 7 : 19. 1 Sam, 25 : 24. Ex. 1 : 19. Ex. 1 : 22. Ex. 3 : 12. Gen. 14 : 16. 73 74 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 47 46. He Interrogative 1- n^DX--- Yi?n-|Dn (3:ii); id: 'nK -lofc^n (4:9). 2. 'e^"'H-nx "qnnp. cypn (30:i5); -rj^ "'nx'ipi -^b^n T 3. nxn'; nn\in'; nVr hje^ nxD pVn a7:i7). -TV T :iT V T T T T ) V : - In direct, and likewise indirect, interrogation, a particle is used called He Interrogative: 1. It is usually written with H^tef Pa^ah f| 2. Before vowelless consonants, and laryngeals, it is written H 3. Before laryngeals with -t-, it is written ( 31. 2. c) ^ while rarely, especially with letters which have simple S'wa, it is written with D,ge-f6rte separative ( 15. 4) *J^ Note. Frequently no sign of interrogation appears; then the context must be depended upon to reveal the interrogative character of the statement. 47. The Inseparable Prepositions 1- n^'*1.3 (1:1); "I^lna (1:6); iJip^ (1:11); Hnn^ (1:14). 2. 3;"'p13 (1:14); ril'li^db (1:15); b^T2b (1:18); WniD13 (1:26). 3. r\)tvb (2:3); -JDj;^ (2:5); iO^^/or "^mb (1:22); nnS-* ^.,- ^: I- v:iv t: IT 4. -\'\i^b (1:5); ;]2^n^ (1:5); J?">pn^ (1:7); HE'i:!^ (1:10); Dl"? (1:18). 5. D''6^ (1:6); DD^ (1:29); n^nV (3:22). IT T V T "^ J- T Remark l.-^Jl^^b (18:30,32); D^^bx^ (3:5); D^^!:>b (17:7, 8). Remark 2. nlH^ / (4:3) for ''j'nX^; proper writing niH^/- Three prepositions, 3, 3, 7, are always prefixed to the words 1 Ex. 2 : 7. Job 34 : 31. Joel 1:2. * Ex. 11 : 8. 48] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 75 which they govern. Their vowel was, originally, -=-; but now they are found written: 1. Ordinarily, with simple S^wa reduced from a -r 2. Before consonants having simple *wa, with i attenuated from a -^ 3. Before laryngeals having compound S^wa, with the corre- sponding short vowel -^, -v-, -r- (o) 4. Before the Article, with the vowel of the Article. . . . ^ or -?- (S.) 5. Before a tone-syllable, sometimes with tone-long t- (^) Remark 1. The {< of "^ j^^ Lord and D^ibi< God loses its consonantal force after the prepositions ( 43. 1. 6). Remark 2. ^The word niH^j which is written nlH^* ^' ^-f ^^ T : the vowels of ^JHi*^, rather than niH^ ^s it should be written, appears with the preposition as nlil^? (^o be pronounced ^J^J^^). T - T - Note 1. ^The original -=- of the prepositions is usually reduced to T", or rounded to -r- (&) ; it is retained before laryngeals with -=r, but assimilated to -7- before -^, and to -r- (6) before -tt- Note 2. ^For prepositions with pronominal suffixes, see 51.3, 4. 48. The Preposition VQ 1. Y1^0"1P (^^)' r^nnp/^^ nnn-]p (i:7); Dnj?a (2:8) for Dnj^;|p. 2. Y^np (6:14); hVJ^ (1:7) /or ^y_-|p; ;>{-|p. The preposition VQ from, is really the construct state of an ancient noun and is written separately, chiefly before the Article; elsewhere it is prefixed and appears: 1. Usually with its J assimilated ( 39. 1) P 2. Before pj. rarely with D^ges-forte implied ( 42. 1. I;) p but before other laryngeals, with -r- lowered ( 36. 2. 6) p Note. On the form of |^ before pronominal suffixes, see 51. 5. 76 EtEMBNTS OF HEBEEW [| 49 49. Wdw Coniunctive 1. ni (1:1); yiKni (i:2); r^prib] (1=5); d"';i2^) (1=14); D^DE^I (2:4). J- T : 2. p51 (1:4); MfhD^ (1:22); rj1i?D1 (1:26); HIpP^I (MO); n2pJ1 (1:27). t|"I 3. ne?:?! (24:12); n\-11 (12:2) /or n%TI; Dn"'E'jn'; "'JW (6:17). 4. intn (1:2); E'D-ll (1:24); i}']) (2:9); 1J1 (4:12). The conjunction and, originally \ is now found written: 1. Ordinarily with simple wa ( 32. 2. R.) ) 2. Before 3^ D D ( ^^' 4), and vowelless consonants ^ 3. Before laryngeals having compound S^wa, with the corre^ sponding short vowel --, -7-, -r- (6) 4. Before a tone-syllable, sometimes with tone-long -r- (31. l.c) (&) Note 1. 1 with \n^ gives %n*>1 (1:6). Note 2. On I, the strengthened form of ), which is called WSw Conversive and is used with the Imperfect, see 73. i Deut. 4 : 6. 16. 23. 25. IX. Pronouns 50. The Personal Pronoun 1. The following are the forms of the Personal Pronoun: He Kin They (m.) DH. nSH She i^^n They (f.) |n, nlh Thou(Ta.)r\m Ye(,m.) Qm Thou a.) m Ye(t.) |:?K, mns 2. The following are pausal forms : AT -AT T AT T - :at -: 3. The following remarks on the forms of the Pronouns are to be noted: ^ N^ n *^^ ^^ written {^^ j^ in the Pentateuch, except eleven times. b. r]P\a ihou (m.) is written five times defectively p\H* T - T - c. pj< thou (f.) was originally ''Ht^ or PRJ^; seven times . - . - I . _ 5*^iv has ''nX* which would be pronounced atti. ^' ^Ji^ ^ (c-) is more common than the longer form ^2 j{< -: 'IT e. njin ihey (f.) is more common than JH* ^^i^ latter occurring TJ- I " only with prefixes. / \P\ii y^ (f-) occurs but once/ HJOi^j but four times.^ g. ^yny^ we is the usual form, ^^Hi occurring but six times,' and a form 1J>< but once> Note 1, ^The H which appears in several of the forms was perhaps originally demonstrative, but has lost its force. Note 2. The following comparative table of the personal Pro- nouns in the more important Semitic languages will be of interest: Ezek. 34:31. Gen. 31:6; Ezek. 13:11,20; 34:17. Gen. 42:11; Ex. 16:7,8; Num. 32:32; 2 Sam. 17:12; Lam. 3:42. Jer.42:6(e:*iv). 77 78 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [51 Arabic. Assyrian. Aramaic. Hebrew. huwa su >^ ana anaku wi< ^DJX hum unu isn^ p3tit, |ten nn. nan hunna ina r^' pjix ) T J" antum antunna attuna attina ym nahnu anini i^^n:^ ijn:, i:nj Note 3. We may note here also the expression ^J0^{< ^J /S^ equivalent to a certain one, and used as an indefinite pronoun.^ 51. Pronominal Suffixes Tabular View Separate Forms. 2 3 With PN. With 3 and ^ 4. 5. With 3. With ID. Singular 3 m. !in ]m 13 iniD3 i-isp ?]DP 2f. ^ ^nx ^3 ^sp ic. vor^i ^nx I? ijip3 ^fpp Plural 3 m. onorD Dnn^ii.Dnx dhs, d3 dhs. DniD3 dhd 3f. jHorj jnn^.jnx "jns ' n|n3 ]np 2 m. D3 DDnX DD3 D33, D3l03 D3D 2^- p - m ' pp ic- 1J =ijn U3 !iJlD3 yoD > C/. Euth 4 ; 1; 2 Kgs. 6 : 8. 51] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 79 When a pronoun is to be governed by a verb, a noun or a preposition, a shortened form must be used: 1. The " separate forms," given above, are the fragments of the pro- nouns which are thus used. They are attached directly to nominal and verbal forms ending in a vowel, but a so-called connecting-vowel is employed with forms ending in a consonant. a. The suffixes Q^* J?' DH and JH always receive the accent and are termed heavy; all others are light. h. ^ is used with nouns; ^J with verbs. c. Qn and JH are used with nouns in both singular and plural, but chiefly with the plural; Q and 1 are used with verbs and singular nouns. Note. On the union of verbs with suffixes, see 74.; on the union of nouns with suffixes, see 112, 113. 2. When for any reason it is impossible, or undesirable, to attach the suffix directly to a governing verb, it may be written in connec- tion with J^{^, the sign of the definite accusative, which, however, except before Q^, assumes the form f^^ or n1i< i^o9). 3. The prepositions 3 and 7 restore and round their original -=- before the suffixes (except ^ and Ti) ; this vowel a. Contracts with IH and forms ) (6), the H falling out and k contracting with H; with H the final a is dropped, the a of the preposi- tion is rounded to &, and H is preserved as a consonant with mappik, the resulting form being T^-r-; but elsewhere, b. It appears as k either before or under the tone. Note. While either Q3 or QHS D^ay be used, only QH / is T V T V T found. 4. Between the preposition 3 and the suffixes, there is generally found an inserted syllable )Q. This syllable is found in poetry also after 2 and 7 (but not when suffixes are added). 5. The preposition JQ before most of the suffixes takes a special form; in some cases, a. The final J is assimilated: Tjpp for ^^BD; ">^rpD for "JJBO; 1-1D {from us) for !|33SO. ^" : At 4K * 8 J V 80 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 53 b. The consonant of the suffix is assimilated backwards and rep- resented in y. !|J|3D (from him) for )r\iDD', HiirSD M nJ?3D. Note 1. The in ^IJiaO, etc., is deflected from -r- ( 29. 4). Note 2. Many variant forms, besides those given, are found, especially in poetry. 52, The Demonstrative Pronoun 1. n\ this (m.) I n^t this (f.) nb^ (^^t) ^Ae^^ (m. or f.) 1 nt A) this (f.) r DH or rirpn those (m.) 2. i^)r\ that (m.) ^5^"-| ^t- T ^- niA'\!^''-r\^ (2 : 19); ni^mO (3 : 13); lOE^-flO (Ex. 3 : 13). h. '>T\mn np (3i:36); wn-H!?'; K\n-nD.' c. rh^-nii'; Dn"'K"i hd^ d^onin na (21:29). d- n^E'v no (4:10); inNcn-no (20:9); Hn-no-' 1. 'JQ refers to persons; nO to things. T 2. no is variously pointed, according 'to the character of the con- T sonant which follows: a. Before consonants which can be doubled, it is HD 6. Before strong laryngeals (H and H)* it is HD c. Before weak laryngeals (J^, U, and *^) it is HD d. Before laryngeals with -r-, it is j^Q Note 1. ^The D&geS-forte following HD is compensative ( 15. 1), arising from the assimilation of H which was a consonant. Note 2. The forms HD and HQ are sometimes found before r other letters than laryngeals. Note 3. In the majority of cases HD is connected with the fol- T lowing word by Makkef, and with HT often forms a single word, H^D* V - Note 4. By means of ^{< {where f) prefixed to the demonstra- tive ni or ni^t> another interrogative is formed. Num. 16 : 11. t Num. 13 : 18. Zech. 1:9. Judg. 9 : 48. Ps. 39 : 6. Cf. Jer. 6 : 7; Ecdes. 11:6; 1 Kgs. 13 : 12. X. The Verb 55, Roots 1. Xna (1:1); ^^"IDP (1:6) from HS; "^^Hnp (3:8) from ")S-I; "nb-'pn (9:17) from Qp; ^2^ (2:3); TDOn (2:5) /rom "ItJD; njHjpBn (3:7) from HpD- 2. X"12 (1:1) he created; n2E^ (2:3) he rested; np^ (2:22) T T - T I ~ "^ he took, rhn (3:8) he walked; yQ\j^ (3:17) he heard; npS (3:7) A^ opened, 3. HID (3:4) to die, HO ^^ <^^e<^; D^^E^ (2:8) to put, QE? Ae put. All words are derived from so-called roots; concerning these it may be noted: 1. While there are a very few roots of four letters, most Hebrew roots consist of three or two letters, called radicals. 2. The root is generally pronounced with the vowels of the third person singular masculine of the Perfect tense ( 57. 3. N. 1), this being the simplest of all verbal forms. 3. Biliteral roots of the middle-vowel classes are commonly pro- nounced with the vowel of the infinitive construct. Note 1. The root is not in itself a word; it exists solely in the mind of the philologist. i<12 is a root, but the word is J5^2- T T Note 2. Many of the roots now appearing to be triliteral, were once biliterals; their triliteral forms are a later development. Note 3. ^For many words there has as yet been found no root. 56. Classes of Verbs 1. o. natS^ (2:3); p3"ri (2:24); ^E^D (1:18); ^12 (1:4); ^ID (2:3). 82 57] BY AN INDUCTIVB METHOD 83 b. 31^ (2:24); Jin (4:8); r|n-1 (1:2); J/ni (1:11); Tih^ (3:22). c. mj (1:17); "la^ (2:7); ^13 (1:1); nJ3 (Lam. 3:5). |-T -T TT TT 2. a. 330 (2:11); b^n:(4:26); pn (33:5); ^^^3 (29:3). 6. mo (3:4); p3'; Dip (13:17); D''fe'^. (30:42). Verbal roots vary in inflection according to the number and nature of the consonants of which they are composed. They are therefore classified as: 1. Triliteral, when composed of three consonants. These again subdivide into three classes: a. Strong verbs, i. e., those containing no consonant which will in any way affect the vowels usually employed in a given inflection. h. Laryngeal verbs, i. e., those containing one or more laryngeals, which involve certain variations in vocalization from the so-called strong verb. c. Weak verbs, i. e., those containing one or more consonants which may suffer assimilation (J ), contraction and elision (1 and ^ ), or quiescence (^ ). Such changes in the consonants, of course, affect the vowels seriously. 2. Biliteralf when composed of two consonants. These subdivide into two classes: a. The so-called 'dym-doubled {))"))) verbs, in which the con- sonantal element of the root is emphasized in inflection. h. The middle-vowel verbs, in which the vowel-element is empha- sized. 57. Inflection 1. a. Kn2 (1:1) from J^^D; DS^ (18:33) from 3E^; 20 (Deut. T T T 2:3) from 2D- h. E^'-np^t (2:3) from ^^p-, np_^ (3:23) from Hp^; ^^\ (4:26) from ^^^ 33lD (2:13) from 3D- Prov. 23 : 1, 84 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 58 c. J|npDi1 (3:5) /rom HpD; TCDOn (2:5) /rom ^CDD; ^^1 (4:26) /rom ^^H; H^E^Ii (Jer. 6:8) /rom 3ef\ T AT 2. nSE^'' (2:2) he mU rest; T^VDE^ (3:10) I heard; ^^^"^^ : : J- T : IT (1:21) <^y swarmed; O^^J^ (3:11) Aaf ^^w ecrfenf T ; IT T ninpSni (3:7) they were openM; ^iQ"! (17:12); K2"'^ (4:3). 3. inilfl'' (4:8) he vnU kiU him; Hi^DJ^P (3: 17) thouahalt eatit. w : - I* Tjv -; The inflection of a verb includes three things: 1. The formation of verb-stems, of which there are, a. The simple verb-stem, generally identical with the root. h. Verb-stems formed by strengthening the simple root in vari- ous ways, especially by doubling or repetition of one or more radicals, c. Verb-stems formed by the use of jprefixes. 2. The addition to the verb-stem of affixes and prefixes for the in- dication of tense or mood, person, number, gender. 3. The various changes of the verbal forms, which take place when pronominal suffixes are attached as objects. Note 1. ^The Hebrew verb has for each stem (1) a Perfect tense, which indicates finished or completed action, (2) an Imperfect, which indicates unfinished action, (3) an Imperative (except in Passive stems), (4) two Infinitives, and (5) a Participle. Note 2. ^The Perfect and Imperfect, which may be called tenses, are inflected to distinguish number, person, and gender. Note 3. The Imperative is used only in the second person, masculine and feminine, singular and plural. S8, The Verb-Stems 1- TSy^ (2:3); X-)-3 (1:1); HD"^ (3:22); 2Ef; ^^ (11:9)- -T TT ]~ ^ T-T 2. 6cDpJ]; n2Di^ JlDJ (41:32); 3DJ^ n32i'; ^DE^J y^oich one's self; tOB^f J go to law one with another. Jer. 30 : 18. 2 Sam. 6 : 20. Num. 34 : 4. 1 Kgs. 6 : 7. 58] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 86 3. 6E)p]; na-l (12:4); {^jpO^ H^ (18:33); rj-j2 (24:1); *1D7 learn; H^^ ieocA; Zf^ilJ ^oo<; E^*1E^ uproot, 4. 6Dp]; 1J5S'; xnp'i "^130'; npj' *'<"'^'- n^b^ewas taken. 5. 6''ppn]; Tpen (39:5); pMnn"; D''pn'; 2pn-' 6. 6Bpn]; ipsn'; "^^tpn'; n^n"; "s^^E^n" 7. 62spnn]; ^i'nnn (6:9); aa^jni (6:6); isnE^K." pieaj (44: 16) /orphan:; iK3T"/o'-i3'nn^; nnon" I IT - : I IT - : s - : - : -: it for nnenn- ~: IT : There are in common use seven verb-stems, each representing a different aspect or development of the primary meaning of the verb. 1. The simple verb-stem is called Kdl (^p), i. e., light, since it presents the verb in its simplest form, not encumbered with the addi- tions characteristic of the other stems. 2. a. The Passive of the ^al stem is called Nifdl. Note. In all stems other than the !^al, the stem name is formed from the paradigm-verb used by the Arabic and the Jewish gram- marians, viz., 7i^S; thus the name of this stem = /^^DJ- b. The formal characteristic of this stem is the prefixed J. c. The meaning of the stem is usually passive, but it occurs also with its original reflexive force, and sometimes as reciprocal. 3. a. The intensive active stem is called Ptel (triliteral) or Polel (biliteral). b. The formal characteristic of this stem is the doubling or repe- tition of the second radical of the root. c. The stem is used as an intensive of the J^al, and expresses various shades of meaning such as (1) intensity, (2) repetition, (3) Ex. 35 : 35. Ex. 38 : 21. Isa. 48 : 8. Num. 22 : 6. Judg. 7:8. 'Josh. 4:9. 2Kgs. 16:18. 'Jer. 6:6. Dan. 9:1. josh. 9 : 24. Dan. 8 : 11. Ps. 18 : 24. "Job 5: 4. MEzr. 6:20. 80 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [58 causation, and (4) a privative idea, in the case of Pi'els from nominal forms. 4. a. The intensive passive stem is called Pudl (triliteral) or Polal (biliteral). 6. The formal characteristic of this root is the doubling or repe- tition of the second radical, with u or 6 under the first radical. c. The regular usage of this stem is as a passive of the Pi'el; but sometimes it serves as passive of the !^al. 5. o. The active causative stem is called Hifil. b. The formal characteristic of this stem is the prefix H* which undergoes modification in inflection. c. This stem serves as a causative of the J^al. 6. a. The passive causative stem is called Hofdl. b. The formal characteristic is the prefix n> which under- goes change in inflection. c. The usage of this stem is as a passive of the Hif'tl. 7. a. The intensive reflexive stem is called HWpd^eL b. The formal characteristic of this stem is the prefix pj*], joined to the Pi'el stem. c. This stem is used primarily as a reflexive of the Pi'el stem; but it occurs also with (1) a reciprocal, (2) a passive force, and (3) the force of the indirect Greek middle. Note. ^The n ^^ ^^^ prefix is always transposed when it would stand before D> ^ or {jf; it is transposed and partly assimilated, be- coming tD, when before Jf; and it is completely assimilated before XL The Triliteral Verb A. THE STRONG VERB 59, General View of the Triliteral Verb-Stems TABLE Original Form. Form appearing in the Perfect. Name. Force. Characteristics. 1. h^p, 2. ^!P|!5J 3. ^Bp 4. ^ISp 7. bsDnn bop bp bsDnn l^al Nifal H-51 Pu'al Hifil Hofal Hi^a'el Simple Root None meaning Reflexive, Reciprocal, 2 Passive Intensive Active D&g5.f6rte in 2d radical f Intensive \ Passive D&geS-forte and-T- Causative Active n (n) Causative Passive r\ (0) Reflexive, Reciprocal nn and D&ge-f6rte REMARKS 1. An original penultimate -=- is attenuated to -^, in Nif'al, K'el, and Hif'tl. 2. An ultimate -:- is lowered to -:r-, in some Pi'el, Hif 'il and Hl^pa'el forms. 3. An ultimate -r- is anomalously lengthened to ^ , in some Hif'il forms. 4. An original penultimate -s- is deflected to ~ (6) in the HSf^. 87 88 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 60 NOTES* 1. Only 6 verbs out of about 1400 have all seven stems, viz.: J?p3, nbh nbn i;^^ ^^^ nps. TT TT -T "T I"* 2. 379 verbs are found in ^fSl only; 40 in Nif'al only; 68 in Pi'el only; 11 in Pu'al only; 58 in Hif'il only; 6 in Hof'al only; 19 in Hi^pa'el only. 3. In all, 1090 verbs have a J^U stem; 433, a Nif'Sl stem; 405, a Pi'el stem; 188, a Pu'al stem; 503, a Hif'il stem; 104, a Hof'al stem; 177, a Hi^pa'el stem. 60. The J^&l Perfect {Active) TABULAR VIEW 1. He killed ^COp the simple verb-stem. - I T 2. Shs killed H^Dp == ^Kp with n_ (originally H ), T : |lT - |t t the usual feminine sign. 3. Thou (m,) killedst P^JDp = 7C0p with p\; cf. the pronoun nnx t^n (m.). T - 4. Thou (f.) kiUedst n^DD = ^COP with p; c/. the pronoun pX : : - I T - J r : : - thou (f.). b.IMUed "^nb^P = ^QP with "Jr^, the affix of 1st person in all Perfects. 6. They killed ibCDp = /Dp with J|, the usual plural sign with verbs. 7. Ye (m.) H/e(f DnbCOP = bCOP with Qpl; c/. the pronoun V : - J: - |r 8. Ye {I) killed |n^Cp == ^Dp with jp; c/. the pronoun % We killed IJ^IDp = ^tpp with JjJ; c/. the pronoun Yoimg's Introduction to Hebrew, pp. 16, 17. 61] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 89 REMARKS 1. The pronominal elements used in the inflection of the Perfect are always o/-fixed to the stem. 2. The inflection of the verb exhibits distinctions for number, per- son and gender. Special forms for the feminine occur in the 2d and 3d person sing., and in the 2d person plur. 3. a. The original vowels of the ^al Perfect are a a (?COp)- In the form 7C0D the a under the tone remains unchanged, while - h the a in the open syllable before the tone is rounded to a. The same vowel change takes place in forms 3, 4, 5 and 9. h. In forms 2 and 6, the vowel-terminations H {she) and !) {they) draw the preceding consonant away from the ultimate vowel (a) of the stem; the change of this vowel to S'wa follows ( 36. 3) and the a of the preceding syl. being now immediately before the tone-syl. is rounded to a. c. The heavy terminations QR (=2/^ (m.)) and |J][) {ye (f.)) carry the tone; the a in the final syl. of the stem is retained unchanged in the closed unaccented syllable; while the a of the open ante- penult is reduced to wa ( 36. 3. N. 2). 61, The K&l Perfect (Stative) [For the full inflection, see Paradigm B.J TABULAR VIEW 3 m. sg. 3 f. sg. 3 c. pi. 2 m. pi. 1 c. pi. Middle A ^ipp r\b:2p^ ib^p^ ^^^^p. iJ^5?i? Middle E ViDp rhpp^ =ibDj;5 Dph^p iJ^Dp Middle o hbp^ n^Dp, i^Dp, QJ!>)!?R i^^^j? 1. p31 (2:24); ))i'\^ (1:21); UPW^^ (42:22); inVOE^ (3:10). 2. ]pl (18:12); l^JpT (18:13); IDS (12:10); ni23 (18:20); maS'; lE^T"; nnX (37:3), btU ^nX (27:9); i2nK T I" T I" T - T I" T I -: (44:20). > Judg. 20 : 34. Joel 1:12. 90 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 62 3. by (32:26); !)^DV; in^^l (30:8); ""WbD (32:11); in^iEf T AT :jT :J|T 'tWT (43:14). Certain verbs expressive of physical or mental states of being are called stative verbs. They show some characteristic forms in inflec- tion. 1. Stative verbs with ^- under the second radical of the Jfal stem are inflected in the manner described in the preceding section ( 60.). 2. Verbs with -^ (lowered from -r-) under the second radical, do not differ from those with -^ in the inflection of the Perfect, except that the -^ appears a. in the Perfect 3 masc. sing., and b. when restored in pause ( 38. 1), or before the tone. 3. Verbs with -^ (lowered from -c-) under the second radical re- tain the o whenever the tone would rest upon it, and in pause. 62, The Remaining Perfects [For the full inflection, see Paradigm B.] TABULAR VIEW OF IMPORTANT FORMS 3 m. sg. 3 f. sg. 3 c. pi, 2 m. pi. 1 c. pi. Piei ^ipp2 rh^p )b^p DPi^Bp )ibpp, ffi^aei bspnn n^cppnn )b^pnn on^ispnn iJ^^pnn Hifii ^ippn rh-'^pn )b''^pr\ DphQpn iJ^Qj^n 1. a. noi^'J'; <"nnpy; inpDJ (3:5); DniDE^r; ^^')2iy b. -1^1 (4:26); nib^ (24:15); n^*"* -(6:1); DmV""; "TnH' Ex. 8 : 14. Or h^^. 2 Sam. 20 : 10. Num. 5 : 13. Deut. 2:4. Mai. 3 : 13. Jer. 22 : 26. Jer. 20 : 14. 63] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 91 0. ip^n'; niDH^ D^e^n'; nD^e^n*; ^nnaE^n-' 2. a. -15"! (44:2); nn31. (39:19); n21 (45:15); Dni?!-' 6- -E^^pnn'; lE^'ipnn'; DriE^ipnn'; ^nb^annv" c. -)''c?pn (2:5); nnnDH"; iiTian"; ''ripsi'"'"' Of the remaining Perfects, it will be noticed that 1. Three follow entirely the inflection of the J^al Perfect, viz., a. The Nifal (bW} f^om bW})- b. The Pu'al (bw}- c. The Hofal (^COpn* also sometimes ^COpH). 2. Three present slight variations from the inflection of the |f al, viz., a. The Pi'el (^H and ^H, from blDp), in which - appears in the ultima before terminations beginning with a consonant. b. The Hi^a'el (/pnH <^^^ 72Dpnn)> in which, also, a appears, but sometimes i is retained. c. The Hif'il (b^^^Dn, anomalous for ^tDpH, from ^ppH), in which, (1) before the vowel-terminations H^f" and ^, the anomalous i is retained and accented; while (2) before terminations beginning with a consonant, ^=- every- where appears. 63, The l^di Imperfect (Active) TABULAR VIEW 1. He will kill bbp^> for b^V\ (with \). 2. She will kill ^bpO^ for /ppH' R ^^^ nsual sign of the feminine, here prefixed. Lev. 5 : 23. Joel 1:9. Jer. 22 : 28. < Isa. 14 : 19. Jer. 8 : 21. Ex. 12 : 32. ' Isa. 30 : 29. Num. 11 : 18. Lev. 11 : 44. " Ezek. 38 : 23. " Lev. 26 : 22. 12 Deut, 25 : 1. " Jer. 13 : 11. " 1 Kgs. 3:7. 92 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [63 3. Thm (m.) wilt kill ^bpFl^ for ^^p^^ T\ being a pronom. root of 2d pers., c/. nn{< thou (m.). T - 4. f Aow (f.) wilt kill ^hWT\y for ^^pn (with R as above), andV (jiK is found In KMv seven times for nw thou (t). 64] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 93 2. a. The stem of the Imperfect is 7JDp* whence comes ^tOp through the influence of the] tone. C/. Arabic yaktvl. The original form of the Impf . stem was kutvl, and the same stem forms the basis of the Imperative and Infinitive Construct forms. When the preformative of the Impf. was added, it naturally drew to itself a secondary tone, and so the u of the following syllable was easily lost (c/. business, pronounced biz-ness). It reappears in cer- tain forms of the Infinitive Construct and Imperative. b. The 6 is often written fully {)); but this must be regarded as an error, since it is a tone-long vowel. c. When /bp^ and similar forms are connected by MSJ^fcef with a following word, thus losing the tone, the original ii is not lowered to 5, but deflected to 6 (j). 3. The vowel-terminations *> (seldom V^ ) and ) (seldom ))) draw the preceding consonant away from the ultimate vowel, which then necessarily passes into S*wd ( 36. 3. a). 4. The termination HJ (seldom 1) does not receive the tone. 64. The J^&l Imperfect (Stative) [For full inflection, see Paradigm B.] TABULAR VIEW OF IMPORTANT FORMS 3 m. sg. 2 f. sg. 3 m. pi. 3 f. pi. Impf. with bb\:>\ "'^Dpn i^Djp"; nj^bjisn Impf. with a biD^^, '^cppn I^Dj?^ '""^^^pJ? Impf. withe ^jpj:)"! ""^Dpri i^Dp"'. n^^Dpn 1. niHE'l. (2:2); -|J|D''. (2:21); )\i'^\^) (1:20); nSH": (3:7); 1-133^7:18). ' 2. 22^\ (30:15) from 232^; ^1^. (21:8) from ^3; n3r. (7:18); ^2^^ (27:45); nOa"" (2:5); ^tS"" (2:8); nb^l - : V AT : " - . - : (3:22); !)y3n (3:3). 3. |n: (1:17); |rin (3:6); Tj^D (3:14); J is used also in verbs, whether active or stative, which have a laryngeal for the second or third radical. 3. Some verbs whose first radical is ), and the verb ^flJ ^^ S^^*^^* have for the Imperfect stem the form ^COp> ^- ^-i e instead of 6 or a. No strong verb has this stem. Note 1. There were three Perfect stems, ^JOp, bCOp> and /top) ^^^ so there are three Imperfect stems, ^\Qi^'*>, ^^0*^, and L . ... . ^'--h' 7C0p^j the a in each case being original, while the e and 6 have come from i and ii respectively. Note 2. It will be seen later that the stem-vowel of the Im- perative varies with that of the Imperfect. 65. The Remaining Imperfects [For full inflection, see Paradigm B.] TABULAR VIEW OF IMPORTANT FORMS 3 m. sg. 2 f. sg. 1 c. sg. 3 f, pi. Pi el ^pi ^bspn ^px n:bBpn(^D) Hini b''D|-5i('?!pj:5l) '^"'Dpn ^^Dj^x n:^c?j?n 1- TIS"; (2:10); -|nD}< (4:14); nilE'n (6:11); TQ^\ (8:2). 2. E'^p^ (2:3); -13T (8:15); -)3nn (31:24). 65] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 96 3. aai/n'' (6:6) icDp^n""; niDsnc'n-' 4. nsDi'; iBp)^n^ nsp^; n^j:pn^ ^il^^- 5. t:;2|p: (3:21); pn^niz;n; in\32;n^ ^^t (i:4); piz^: (3:24); T]^E:^n (21:15). 1. a. The 5 used as a Jussive ( 69.), and with Wdw Conversive ( 70.), the -^ of which is regulariy lowered from -^; (2) the retention and accentuation of the stem-vowel ^-r- before the vowel-additions ^-r-, J|; (3) the occurrence of , rather than ^ , before HJ* T Note 1. ^The following table will be found serviceable: 1. Name of stem, ?al, Nif., Pi., Pu., Hif., Hof., Hi^a. 2. Preformative with vowel, * ^ *! ^. ^ ^ 01 3. First radical with vowel, p p p p p p p Note 2. ^The various elements used as preformatives and af- formatives appear from the following table, the asterisks represent- ing radicals: 3 m. He will ***" 3 f. She will ***n 2 m. ThouwiU ***n 2 f. Thou wilt ***n 1 c. / shall ***X 66, The Imperatives TABULAR VIEW Impf. Imv. 2 m. sg. Imv. 2 f. sg. Imv. 2 m. pi. Imv. 2 f. pi. ^aiwitho ^b|T ycDp "i^Qp )b^p ^^Y^i^ ?aiwitha h^p^_ ^Dp 'bDp ^biDp, nj^pp - Jt Jt : Jit : Jit t : <- J t They will !)***^ They will nr**n Ye will r**n Ye will nj***n We shall ***. 66] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 97 Pi-el ^EDpi b^p_ ib^p !i^ipp nj^Epj^ ffifii ^ipp-i bcppn ''b'^ppn i^^cpp).-! n^bo^i^n mepa-ei ^pni ^iDpnn ^^Bpnn 6spnn nj^^pnn 1. a. ISr (8:1), -ibr; Dhp^S 2h3'; 3312'^ (30:l5),35i;. b. "q^^i^y, ^.^E^y, ^'?E^n'; d^se^'w, dde?: (20:8), c. iDE^n (24:6), -laE^n'"; "ri^^E^r- "^bp^"' |P>nnn". 2. a. !)J<^p (1:22); (rDE^^S (1:28); ^Sfe'ri-" 1. The stem of the Imperative is the same in every ease as that of the Imperfect; it will be noted that, like the Imperfect, a. The l^a\ has two forms, one (active) with 6, and one (stative) with a. b. The Hif'il corresponds in form to the Jussive Imperfect in e (69.), rather than to the usual Imperfect, which has i. Both fonns are naturally more quickly spoken than the Indicative. c. The initial H which is always absent from a preformative in the Impf ., appears in the Imperative of the Nif 'al, Hif'il, and Hi^pa'el. Note. ^The pure passives Pii'al and Hof'al have no Imperative. 2. In the inflection of the Imperatives, it will be seen that a. Before vowel-additions, the vowel of the stem disappears (except in the Hif'il); and the short i under the first radical of the J^al fern, sg., and masc. pL, stands in a closed syllable, the translit- eration being kit-li, kitlil. Note. Occasional forms like Oti^D^^ ^"D/D^^f and certain : T -IT forms with pronominal suffixes ( 71. 3. 6) show that the original Imv. 1 Deut. 9 : 7. a Ex. 24 : 4. 3 Ex. 17 : 14. * 2 Sam. 13 : 5. 5 Isa. 2 : 20. Ex. 7 : 10. 7 Ex. 7 : 9. 8 Judg. 9 : 33. Ex. 8 : 16. M Jndg. 13 : 13 Deut. 7 : 3. " 1 Sam. 18 : 22. " Isa. 47 : 2. " Jer. 7 : 29. IS Job 33 : 31. w Ps. 5 : 3. " Ezek. 32 : 20. " Judg. 9 : 10. 12 (?:r6). 98 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 67 stem was probably vocalized ^COD- Hence the i of fem. sg. and masc. pi. is perhaps thinned from u. b. The Hif 'il Imv. has e as its stem-vowel in the masc. sg., and fem. pi., but i in the fem. sg. and masc. pi. Note 1. ^The stem of the Imperative receives no preformatives, and its afformatives are those of the Imperfect. Note 2. On the Imperative with H (cohortative) see 69. 67. The Infinitives TABULAR VIEW K&i. Nirai. Pfei. Pu'ai. Hidpa*ei. Hiru. Hsrai. ^top b'w bwnn ^copn bwn bbp bapn b^p, b^pnn ^ippn 1. IW'; p^r\'; rjbpj (3i:30); 121'; 2il^, (40:i5); DSE^n*; b'^2r\.' "I - 2. a. btJr2 (1:18); "SD^ (3:24); but 2J^ (34:7); niSH'; -131_ (17:22); t^j?3'; b'^l^ri (1:18); n23nn. b. n'2'\p\ nan"i'; nne^a-" T ;Jt t : t t : t Each stem has two Infinitives, called Absolute and Construct; but no example is found of a Pu'al or Hof'al Infinitive Construct. 1. The Infinitive Absolute has the form of a noun, and is not based upon either the Perfect or Imperfect stem. o. In the penult, an original a becomes k in the J^slI and in one form of the Nif 'al, i in the other Nif 'al, and remains unchanged in the Pi'el, Hi^a'el and Hif'il; while original u appears in the Pu'al and is deflected to 6 in the Hof'al. Deut. 5 : 12. Jer. 32 : 4. Ex. 4 : 14. < 1 Sam. 17 : 16. Isa. 56 : 3. Num. 15 : 31. M Sam. 10 : 2. Nah. 3 : 15. Ex. 36 : 2. m Ex. 30 : 18. " Ex. 29 : 29. 68] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 99 b. In the ultima: (1) 6 (=a) in the |fal, Nif'al, Pu'al, and sometimes in Pi el. (2) e in the Hif il, H6f*al, Hi^pa'el and usually in Pi'el. Remark. 1. The Nif'al Infinitive Absolute has two forms, one (7J3pJ) following the analogy of the Perfect; the other (/bpH)* following the analogy of the stem appearing in the Inf. Construct and Imperative. Remark 2. ^The 6 in the Inf. Abs., arising always from a, is seldom written fully. Old noun forms in Arabic likewise show long vowels written defectively. 2. a. The Infinitive Construct has, in each case, the form of the stem found in the Imperfect and Imperative. Remark. Stative verbs, which have a in the Imperfect and Imperative, have, nevertheless, 6 in the Infinitive Construct. The cases of an Infinitive Construct with a are very few. h. The If al Inf. Construct not infrequently takes a form with H This form is found especially with the preposition 7. Note 1. ^The ultimate vowel of the various Infinitives Con- struct is changeable, while that of the Infinitives Absolute is un- changeable. Note 2. Only to the Infinitives ^Construct may prepositions be prefixed, or suffixes added. 68, The Participles TABULAR VIEW ](f al Active. ?:al Stative. ^fal Passive. Nifal. Piel. Impf. ^p'; Pu'al. ~ 1 : Hlffl. Hofal. Hi^a'el. Part. ^Bpp b!Sj?D ^^ippp bippo b^^rp 1. a. Erp-I (1:26); oVh (41:1); Tj^H (2:14); laj; (4:2); |m (9:12). 100 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 69 b. IpT (18:11); -in3 (13:2); ubp (33:18); ^3 (26:13). c. ^n2 (9:26); niHS'; ilE^ni^ "IHE?-' / T T T : T 2. ino:'; -isE^:^; iney; csse^j-' 3. naip (27:6); ^^::r2 (37:16); 2/lpD; T]>>nnp (3:8); HdD (l:6);n^n2;D (6:13); TCDO (7:4); rh^^Q-' 1. The Ifal stem has two participles; the remaining stems, one each: a. The l^al active is 70p (sometimes ^COlp)=kotel for katil; the 6 being obscured from an original a, the e lowered from i. b. The J^al stative participle has the form of the Perfect 3 masc. sg., 7 Cod (=katel); it is not so uniformly used, however, as is the !(fal active, c. In the Kal passive participle, viz., 7lC0p (=kattil/or kattil); the t\ is unchangeable, but the a, rounded from a, is changeable. 2. The Nif'al Participle is the same as the Nif'al Perfect, with the vowel of the ultima rounded, since the Participle is a nominal form ( 36.). 3. The remaining Participles are made by prefixing Q to that form of their respective stems which is used in the Imperfect: a. This Q has -r- under it in the Pi'el and Pu'al, while in the other ^ems it takes the place of the initial H of the stem. 6. The ultimate vowel, if not long in the stem, is changed under the tone, the participle being a nominal form. Note 1. ^The D is probably related to the pronouns ^Q and HD- T Note 2. ^For feminine forms of the participle, see 115. 69. Special Forms of the Imperfect and Imperative 1. ni>ni< (27:41) / will kill; rh'!}'^^ (12:2) / will make great; rTl3nK^^^W(=must) speak; nJ3^J (11-3) Let us make 1 Deut. 28 : 61. Isa. 62 : 12. Lev. 22 : 22. Ps. 19 : 7. Isa. 61:1. Judg. 4:11. Jer. 2:35. sEzek. 48:11. 2 Sam. 20 : 21. w 2 Sam. 14 : 15. 69] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD' , . iOl brick; nS*1E^J (11:3) Let us burn; HmDi (31:44) Let wt T : : T : : cut (a covenant); ni^StJ-^ T : - 2. 6!pj:5\ cf. ^^cppij; r\-\yj-' "inon'; nps^ (4i:34). 3. iT^ST* rairaA;; Ha^n' OA atw; nytl'Dn' ^enrf. t:t t:- tj):- Remark.-t5J-TlSn (13:9); J^J-I^DE^'; N3"nQ^S (19:20). Some special forms of the Imperfect and Imperative deserve no- tice: 1. The Cohortative Imperfect: a. This is characterized by the ending H before which a preceding vowel, unless unchangeable, becomes o'wa. It is found, with few exceptions, only in the first person singular and plural. b. Its special signification is that of desire, determination^ and, in the plural, exhortation. 2. The Jussive Imperfect: a. This is, wherever possible, a shorter form than the regular Imperfect. It is found chiefly in the 2d and 3d persons; and in strong verbs only in the Hif'il stem (viz., with -^ instead of ^__>); but in all stems of verbs H"^ ( 82.) and Y'J? ( 86.). The w^w- conversive form of the Imperfect is also that of the Jussive (cf, 70.). b. Its special signification is that of toish, command; with a negative, dissuasion, prohibition. 3. The Cohortative Imperative; this, like the Cohortative Imper- fect, is characterized by the ending H > ^^^ is often more emphatic than the ordinary form. The Hif . Imv. changes -^ to ^ before H Remarks. ^The modal idea in each of these three forms is in- tensified or enlivened by the particle J^J, which is frequently found T in connection with them. Note 1. ^The regular Imperfect and Imperative forms may without change convey the ideas characteristic of the forms here discussed. * Ct. 1 : 4. s Mai. 2 : 12. Ps. 27 : 9. Neh. 5 : 19. Ps. 6 : 5. Ps. 5:3. Judg. 13 : 14. 10? ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 70 Note 2. ^The shorter form of the Imperative corresponding to the Jussive is confined to n"^ verbs, e. g., 75 for H y^- 70. The Perfect and Imperfect with W&w Conversive 1- a. . .-loii"! (3). . .nn\-i y-ixni (2). . .xi3 rriK^xna d^i) V J " T : IT I vjT T : T T " : . x-)p r^prh) x-ij:)'i (5) . . . ^^d^v i!i (4) . . . %-i^i . .^TV -Hn^v -E^J?'.! (7). . .-lai^^i (6). . . .%Ti. . . .^Tl %Ti not^^i (9) %Ti ^Tl xnp'i () b D"ipi2^n rp13 nhKD ^T [D\"l'^K lO^^^lI (1:14) . -n'liJ^D^ rnv . .-rimb vn) : T : : t : ^m ^?^i D^'nn y^o d? np^i n^, n^e?": |s (3:22) IT : 2. a. n3?^'.l (2:2); ^T|2'>1 (1:4); nJUpSI (2:21); ^1^^) (2:3); T)-1.3"ll (1:22). 6- pDll (2:24); Hp^l (3:22); ^Kl (3:22); niD^^I (24:14); j-t: /-': -t; t:it: n'?DX1 (3:18). jt : - IT : 3. a. 1TO-j,Tl (4:8); ^12^1 (1:7); DS^-l'l (14:15); rp;2^] (1:22); HnE^H'T (15:6). nnn^l (15:10); 1Dpe^1 (18:16); "laTI (17:3); niSE^'l (2:2). Remark. f2^;il, 6m< DE^a^i) (3:21). ft-^innoxi (3:13); noDxi (3:i6); inn^E^i (3:20); inn^i '(3:21)V^n^WU6:6)."' < ; ~ IT : The use of the Perfect and Imperfect with the so-called W&w Conversive^ is one of the most marked peculiarities of the language. These cases are cited from Exodus. The form is usually called Waw Consecutive; but this name claims too much for the form; the older term Conversive, while not ideal, is less objectionable. 70] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 103 Only what relates to the forms of the conjunction, and to the verbal forms to which the conjunction is joined, will here be noticed. 1. The facts in the case, briefly stated, are as follows: a. In continued narrations of the past, the first verb is in the Perfect, while those that follow, unless they are separated from the con- junction by intervening words, are in the Imperfect and connected with the preceding Perfect by means of WHw Conversive. b. In the narration of actions which are to occur in the future, or which can only be conditionally realized, or which are indefinite so far as their character or occurrence is concerned, the first verb is in the Imperfect (or Participle, or Imperative), while those that fol- low, unless they are separated from the conjunction by intervening words, are in the Perfect and connected with the preceding verb by means of W&w Conversive. Note. ^This more common usage is very often modified in vari- ous ways; but a consideration of these questions belongs to Syntax, and cannot be taken up here. 2. The form of the conjunction, however, is not the same in both cases: a. With the Imperfect, the conjunction is ), but (1) the following consonant regularly has D^geS-forte; (2) the D,ges-f6rte may be omitted from a consonant which has only S*wa under it ( 14. 2), and (3) before {<, in the first person, the Dige-f orte being omitted, the preceding -=- becomes -?-. b. With the Perfect, the conjunction is the same as the ordinary W,w Conjunctive, with its various pointings ( 49.). 3. With reference to the verbal form employed, a. In the case of the Imperfect, there is used, (1) in the first person, a lengthened form exactly similar to that of the Cohortative ( 69.)' a usage which is rare and late; Cf. nnWNj (32 : 6); npSna) (41 : 11); nnPifii) (43 : 21); njiiK) (Num. 8 : 19); also z. 7 : 27-9 : 6, in which there are seventeen cases. 104 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 71 (2) in the second and third persons, a short form like that of the Jussive ( 69.) and found in many weak and bi- literal verbs and in the Hif'il of strong verbs. (3) a form with accent on the penult, and the consequent vowel changes; but the penult cannot carry the accent unless it is an open syllable, and the final syllable has a changeable vowel. This form cannot occur in the strong verb. (4) the ordinary verbal form unchanged. Remark. With Waw Conversive the Hif'il, therefore, has e in- stead of i; but this i is usually restored, though written defectively, before suffixes. b. In the case of the Perfect, the usual verbal form is employed; but, whenever possible, this form is marked by a change of accent, the tone passing from the penult to the ultima. Note. As a matter of fact, the cases in which there is no change of tone are as numerous as those in which there does occur change. These cases are grouped by Driver^ as follows: (1) in those forms of the Perfect (3 sg., 2 f em. sg., 3 com. pi., 2 masc. pi., 2 f em. pi.) which are al- ready Milra; (2) when the Perfect is immediately followed by a mono- syllable, or dissyllable accented on the penult; (3) when the Perfect is in pause; (4) in the 1 pi. of all conjugations, and in 3 fem. sg. and 3 pi. of the Hif'il; (5) in the |Cal of verbs ^'\> and H''^; (6) frequently in those forms of ^"^ and Middle-Vowel ^^Is and Nif 'als which end in !) and H "^' 71, The Verb with Suffixes [See Paradigm C at end of book.) 1. a. rnbcop for rh^ph innbx (37:20); i:nDDD'; - T J: T : jiT : AT T -; * : it t : "ijnDBi?^'; iJnjjvo'; r^n^Dp m ph^py, 'Jni^y; 1Jn^^J?ri'; ^JniS^DJ (31 =28); i;n-)21 (40:14). Use of the Tenses in Hebrew,* S HO. Isa. 63 : 5. Ps. 69 : 3. * Num. 20 : 14. Jer. 15 : 10. Judg. 11 : 35. ^ Ezek. 16 : 19. Zech. 7:5. Nmn. 20 : 5. 71] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 105 6- [I^Op for l^pp]; ?|l)lpj (50:17) for T^^m, DIpDl (33:13) for DIDSn- Remarks.HDn (44:20); "-JinDE^'; "'JnE'X (30:13); T]-|3DX^; ?]^"'2i2'n (50:6). c. [^"^Dpl; D-1DDE''; in-J2^1T= ^^.^9? (^''^^^ m-h^DV, ijnj (31:7) /or !in-:nj; D-jnj>; Tisnx'; T T |: T : T T : t t : J : -: ?]-I3:y'; ?]nW'; TjOnT; ^ib^S^ (32:18). [i:n^Dp, "nn^Dp]; seeabove,l.a; QmnX"; DH^DX-" Remark.-t-|n (4:25) for !)nnn; Vnyi"' (18=19) for ^rvr\V'\^: wn^^'Vor^nm^^ nvT(24:i6)/orn;?T; When the object of a verb is a pronoun, it is often expressed by the union of J^{^ and the pronominal suffix. More often, however, the pronominal suffix is joined directly to the verbal form. This occa- sions certain changes of termination and of stem. When a suffix is added to a verbal form, the form becomes subject, so far as the in- fluence of the tone is concerned, to the laws controlling the vocaliza- tion of nouns. 1. In the case of the Perfect with suffixes, it is to be noted, a. In reference to termination-changes , that the older endings are in many cases retained, as (1) the older J^ > ^^r the later H (3 sg. fem.); (2) the older ^p, for the later p (2 sg. fem.); (3) the older ^p, for the later Df^ (2 pi. masc), perhaps after the analogy of ^ in the 3d plural. Remark. J^ occurs for p (2 m. sg.), often before ^J. Jer. 2 : 32. Num. 22 : 17. Deut. 25 : 1. 1 Chron. 13 : 3. Josh. 10 : 19. Deut. 15 : 16. ' Deut. 15 : 12. '1 Sam. 20 r 22. Deut. 13 : 18. w Ps. 48 : 7. " Hos. 2 : 14. " Ruth 4 : 15. " Jer. 49 : 24. 106 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 71 b. In reference to stem-changes, that, in the !^fal, (1) the first syllable, being no longer pretonic when a suffix is appended, reduces its original a in the open syllable to *wa; while (2) the a of the second syllable, which has been reduced be- fore personal terminations beginning with a vowel, is retained, and, in the open syllable before the tone, rounded to k. Remark 1. The -^ of verbs Middle E appears before suffixes. Remark 2. ^The Pi'el and Hi^pa'el take -7- in the last syllable before ?], Q3, |3, but elsewhere the vowel is rejected; while the ultimate t of the Hif 'il suffers no change. c. In reference to the union of termination and suffix, that (1) to a verbal form ending in a vowel, the suffix is attached directly; (2) to a verbal form ending, in ordinary usage, with a con- sonant, the suffix is attached by means of a so-called connecting-vowel which is generally ,, but before ?|, Q3, and |3, is S*wa, and before 71 is e. (3) to the 3 sg. fem. termination H suffixes forming a syllable are attached without a connecting-vowel; other suffixes have a connecting-vowel, viz., e before Tj) but a before Q; the accent, peculiarly, in every case stays on the feminine ending H - Note. Certain changes are quite frequent: (1) ^H ^^ ]; (2) inv to IV; (3) inp_ to m-; (4) o- to nl; O) np to nO-^- I^ the third and fifth of these cases, the d^g. is, perhaps, in compensation for the H- I^ the fifth, the H of the pres- ent form is merely a vowel-letter. In the fourth case, the final vowel was dropped, and the Mapptk in H shows it to be a genuine consonant, rather than a vowel-letter. 2. a. [)b^pr\ for nj^bpni; ^J3E^nn'; "nn^Dln-' Job. 19 : 15. Jer. 2 : 19. 71] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 107 b. ["'J^Dpi]; "'JpeE^^'; ""PlSli^'; ^2/3B^ (32:18); ?]"13|K'; [':'?^p^]; ^:ip2b'';; innsE^^ (40:23); ^jnstc'n-' [^:)cpp^ ^^Qp^i: inn^^i (3:23); Dnsbn'; ?]]!' ["':)''Pj:3"!]; D^2b\ (3:21); inD^E^J (37:20); OTDl^K.' c. "riTaoy"; rnp''^pn"; inp"'^i2^n"; see examples under b. n-i)B)T]; iii2^"ii (9:5); ^^')^m" 3. o. [T|^Bp: Tj^pX (2:17); DD^DX (3:5); DDnp"; bvi ?]n-]22 (35:1). [nbCDDl; m2J? (2:15); mOE^ (2:15); DnOX"; i:"I3i?." Remarks.-[?]^E)p]; '^P^^T' D?"]?!"; n31."; i- ["'j^Dpi; 'j-iDr'; ""jine^^; D'^^^''. i:"ny-" [ni^jpp]; "'jnij;"; DiE^Dn"; innay." [iJ^Di!)]; i:j;pi2; (23:11); 'JIJJIpE' (23:8); "'J^^'PEfn"; 2. In the case of the Imperfect with suffixes, it is to be noted, a. In reference to termination-changes, that HJ (2 and 3 pi. T fern.) always yields to ). Note the analogy to the 3d. pers. plur. in J|, as also appears in the 2d. pers. plur. masc. (see above). 1 Sam. 24 : 16. Ps. 137 : 6. Ps. 42 : 7. < 1 Sam. 1 : 19. Job 29 : 14. Ps. 13 : 2. Deut. 6:31. Ps. 67 : 10. Deut. 9 : 14. w 1 Sam. 23 : 11. " Ruth 2 : 16. " Ex. 1 : 22. "Ps. 8:5. Jer. 23:38. Ps. 42:11. m Ex. 14 : 5. " 1 Kgs. 18 : 10. " Ex. 12 : 31. " Ex. 19 : 9. > 1 Sam. 27 : 1. Judg. 16 : 28. 22 Ps. 16:1. * Prov. 4 : 21. * Josh. 10 : 6. Josh. 10 : 4. Ml Kgs. 20 : 18. 27 1 sam. 7:3. Ps. 143 : 8. Ex. 4 : 3. 108 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 71 b. In reference to stem-changes, that before suffixes, (1) the u (lowered to 6) of J^al forms ending in a consonant usually becomes -r, but 6 before ?], Q^, Y^f the *wa preceding the suffix being vocal; (2) the a of J^sil forms ending in a consonant is retained and rounded to a; (3) the final vowel of Pi'el forms ending in a consonant is ordinarily reduced to -r, but is deflected to e before 71, WDf 15 5 while the i of Hif'il forms remains. c. In reference to the union of termination and suffix, that (1) to verbal forms ending in a vowel the suffix is attached directly; while (2) to verbal forms ending in a consonant, the suffix is at- tached by means of a connecting-vowel, which is gener- ally e, but -r before 71, QJ, O; and e, sometimes I, before Hj (3) in pausal and emphatic forms, suffixes are often attached to a verbal form ending in an, which under the tone be- comes en, of which the J is generally assimilated. Note 1. ^This syllable, ordinarily treated as a union-syllable and called Niln Epenthetic or Demonstrative, is found also before suffixes in old Aramaic. It is probably an old form of the verb. Note 2. In the endings )^ (3 m. sg.) and HJl (^ f- sg.)* the T V D^geS-forte in J perhaps is in compensation for the H from ^H and n respectively. 3. In the case of Infs. and Imvs. with suffixes, it is to be noted that, o. The 5al Infinitive (construct) takes (1) before 7[, D3, |3, generally, the form ^JOp (6); but (2) before other suffixes the form p^T), the 6, in both cases, standing in a closed syllable. (3) as connecting-vowels, those used in the inflection of nouns. Remark 1. The Pi'el Infinitive takes -v- before ?|, Q^^ JD- Remark 2. ^The Infinitive may take either the verbal suffix, ''J, or the nominal suffix "> . 72] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 109 6. The !tfal Imperative, taking the connecting-vowel of the Impf., (1) in the 2 masc. sg., follows the analogy of the Infinitive; (2) in the 2 masc. pL, suffers no change; (3) in the 2 fern. pL,hastheform!|7j3J5 instead of njVCJD* : J T : J J: just as in the corresponding form of the Imperf. with suffixes. Remark 1. ^The Imperative in a retains and rounds the a, as does the Imperfect. Remark 2. In the Hifil, the form ^^pDH is used instead of b^^n- Note. ^The Participles, before suffixes, undergo the same vowel changes as regular nouns of the same formation, and may take either the nominal or the verbal suffixes. 72. General View of the Strong Verb Mood or Tense. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. ]5:ai. Nifai. prei. Hiffp&'ei. pa-ai. Hini. Hsrai. Perfect (3 m. sg.) Imperfect (3m.sg.) Imperative Infinitive Absolute Infinitive Construct Participle Active Participle ^Dp' ^E3j?; bisp' ^Dpnn'bEj^ b^^^nb^^n ^bp bcDpnbtDp 723pnn Vcpip biDpo'pispnp ViDp ^DPJ ^25PD ^'ppp ^DPD C/. also the Middle E and Middle O forms, Sbp. VcDp. iC/. also the form with original -::- in the ultima, Sep. Cf. also the form with original ~=~ in the ultima, SB|5nn. Cf. also the forms with ""^ and ~^, b^p\ Sopv Cf. also the form used as a Jussive, and with W&w Conversive, Vwpv 110 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [{ 73 REMARKS 1. The J^slI is the sunple verb-stem ( 58.). 2. The Nif'al has in every form the letter J; this letter, however, is assimilated and represented by Diges-forte in the Imperfect, Im- perative, and Infinitives ( 58.). 3. The Pi'el has everywhere (1) the vowel -^ under the first radical (except in the Perfect), and (2) a D^ge-f6rte characteristic in the second radical ( 58.). 4. The Hi^a'el is the same as the Pi'el (except in the Perfect) with the syllable J^ri prefixed ( 58. 5). 5. The Pu'al has everywhere (1) the vowel -r under the first radi- cal, and (2) a DSgeS-forte characteristic in the second radical ( 58. 3). 6. The Hif 'il has in all forms (except the Perfect) the vowel -^ under the preformative ( 58. 1). 7. The Hof'al has in all forms the vowel 6 (or ii) under the pre- formative ( 58. 3). B. THE LARYNGEAL VERB 73. Classes of Laryngeal Verbs 1. 2]]^ (2:24); TjEin (3:24); ^5'; HH (18:11); "ly^ (20:18). 2. nni (1:2); DHE^'; n"iy3'; W^'; bn2J-' I - T - T T^: IT - T - : 3. J;D1^ (3:8); xh^ (3:22); U^y-, ^p2 (7:11); nn| (42:27); Remark.-T]nT1 (1:28); nJDDin*; ^nD"1p-' A Laryngeal Verb is one the root of which contains one or more laryngeal radicals. They fall into three classes, viz. : 1. Pe CB) Laryngeal, of which the first radical is a laryngeal ( 74.). 2. 'Ayin {')}) Laryngeal, of which the second radical is a laryngeal ( 75.). Isa. 24 : 7. Jer. 39 : 6. Num. 11:3. Judg. 5 : 26. 1 Sam. 28 : 21. Ps. 28 : 7. Isa. 55 : 9. Ifla. 28 : 3. Isa. 46 : 13. 74] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 111 3. Lamed ('7) Laryngeal, of which the third radical is a laryngeal ( 76.). Remark. ^Verbs with *^ as first or second radical show some of the characteristics of laryngeal verbs, especially in the refusal of *^ to take D&ge-f6rte. Note. The terms Pe Laryngeal, etc., are based upon the order of the radicals in the old paradigm-verb, ^J^S, the first radical being designated by g, the second by y, and the third by 7. 74. Verbs 'Q Laryngeal [For full inflection, see Paradigm Dl TABULAR VIEW Perf. ^^^ ^^y^ ^Qj;j ^^pj;n b^Q^n impf. bi^x}^ b^\}^ ^m*) b"'lD]}"^ b^T imv. "pb;;^ b^:}_ b^yirj b^gvn inf.abs. b'l^y b'iay P^^.^ 1 biivn b:2vn ' I bbvn J """ Inf. const, bhp yco;y ^Oi^H ^"'PJ?'"! Part act. b^'V ^CDJ? b''^^J2 Part. pass, b^^^j b^^]} "pQi?: b^v^^ T T T VIIV T *t: it 1- 6CDr]; nini (1:9); >|?^ ^pj?,j; ^""pifn]; pim (41:56); "TjBnj^; ^inn'; p"'!00*' '^'?J!D (^^-2^^' *"* "'">'?. (^=29); nirjl (31:32); !"i (29:22). Ex. 14:5. >Ei. 7:15. 'Ruth 1:18. 'Deut. 22:25. 112 ELEMENTS OF BEBBEW [ 74 3. a. r\)Z;y, (2:4); i2j;^ (2:5); Tj^DiJt (2:17); Him (3:17); inn (4:25); .lE'i? (6:14); ibX 'A<^ce ibi^^ (1:22); bb^ (47:24); P|b-' i. HE'W (1:26); r\fV}3i^ (2:18); 6CDj;n]; nam (2:9); ^^nn'; ^snj'; niinr; O^E^n: (i5:6). ^iriJn.T (4:8); rfil2}r (27:29); n^J?;! (37:28); DSHl' rf. mo;;.-!', 6" rnoynv; nDK"" (29:22) .< !|SD^ T :j-^-:iv wt : - "^c I- : | v:iv : -i- Verbs, whose first radical is a laryngeal, exhibit the following pecu- liarities (42. 1-3): 1. The laryngeal refuses to be doubled; hence the Diges-forte, rep- resenting J, in the Nif'al Impf., Imv., and Infs., is rejected, and the preceding -r- becomes -n- (even before H)- 2. The laryngeal prefers before it the a-class vowels; hence a. In the !l^al Impf. with 6, and in the Kal Impf. of verbs that are also H'^/ ( Sl')> the original a of the preformative is retained; while b. In the J^sA Impf. with -^, in the Nif'al Perf. and Part., and in the Hif'tl Perf., the original preformative vowel is deflected to e, for the sake of euphony. Remark 1. A few cases occur of forms like ^\0V^ or 7J3i^*'- Remark 2. In n^H ^^^ n^H t^ preformative vowel is regu- larly attenuated to i as in the strong verb. Remark 3. In the Hif. Pf. 3d sg. masc. and fem. and 3d pi., the e of the preformative is due to the influence of the other six forms in which a is the stem-vowel and the preformative vowel undergoes deflection on its account. 3. The laryngeal prefers compound to simple S*wd; hence o. When the first radical is initial and, according to the inflec- tion of the strong verb, would have a simple S'wa, it takes instead -=r or, particularly in the case of X> ^ Num. 21:16. Ruth 1:18. Ex. 7:15. Lev. 8:7. Kx. 7 : 17. Ps. 31:9. Num. 3:6. Ex. 4 : 29. 75] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 113 b. When the first radical is medial, it may either, according to the inflection of the strong verb, have under it a silent S*wa or, in order to facilitate the pronunciation, it may receive a compound *wa as a helping-vowel, which always corresponds to the preceding vowel; thus, -=r -=-, -vt -7-, -tt t- (6). c. When, in inflection, a compound S'wa would come to stand before a simple S*wa, as when vowel-additions are made to a word, the compound S*wa gives way to its corresponding short vowel. d. The combination -vt "t- very frequently becomes -=r -=-, when, in inflection, the tone is removed to a greater distance. Note. ^The H and H of H^ri and H^H have a silent wa according to b (above), when medial and vowelless; but a compound *wa (-vt), when initial and without a full vowel. 75. Verbs 'y Laryngeal [For full inflection, see Paradigm E] TABULAR VIEW ?:&i. Nif&i. prei(i). Pti'ai(i). prei(2). Pti'ai(2). m<>p&'ei. perf. ^X)!? ^xp: bi CnJ>?p^; hut also )b0'; n^^; yW'; ?jn3^Ul:22); \!J-)^^){S:24); 111^^^(4:14); T]n_3 (28:6); Deut. 1:5. Mai. 1:7. Ex. 16 : 28. Ps. 109 : 10. Lam. 2:7. Nimi. 16 : 30. ^ 2 Sam. 7 : 29. 114 ELEMENTS OF HEBEEW [ 75 &. nsrno(i:2); >nDnj(6:7); nnc;(6:i/); lonr; ynT; )^mn'; nn^ni'; ^^ipj;?^; nj;?^' Dnnn^ (45:13); nnpMl8:6). 2. a, nnn^^ ^x^n; nj;3^^ ^x^^^ bxe^'"; n^^?t (34:i9); 6. )::)np''; ):^p'*; lom^^; 'pj;a^^ ^?^^.a^^'; ^Jnip^^ c. ^^^E^^; ^Kil"; bx^"; HHiS^n (6:ii); n^/D^^; ^HD^ (18:6). 3. "'Jlpi^S^; iSn^J'^'; cf. also the words cited under 2. 6. Verbs, whose second radical is a laryngeal, exhibit the following peculiarities ( 42. 1-3): 1. The laryngeal refuses to be doubled; but a. While in the case of J^ (generally), and of "^ (always), the preceding vowel is changed (a to ^, i to e, ii to 6), b. In the case of the stronger laryngeals, viz., y (prevailingly), n and n (almost always), the preceding vowel is retained short, the doubling being implied ( 42. 1. b). Note 1. Lowering of u to 6 in the Pu'al takes place frequently in verbs which retain the i or a of the Pi'el. Note 2. In a few verbs, especially those with {(, the vowel is changed in some parts of the inflection, but in other parts retained. Note 3. ^The vowel which is strengthened on account of the rejection of Diges-forte is unchangeable. 2. The laryngeal prefers the a-class vowels; this is seen a. In the occurrence of a, after the laryngeal, in the ^Cal Impf. and Imv., rather than 6, even in Active verbs; and sometimes in the Pi'el Perf., rather than e. Isa. 40 : 1. 2 Prov. 30 : 12. Gen. 35 : 2. Deut. 13 : 6. Deut. 32 : 21. 1 Kgs. 14 : 10. ' Gen. 13 : 11. Ruth 4 : 4. Ex. 3 : 3. >o Ruth 4 ; 6. " Deut. 4 : 32. " Mai. 3 : 19. "Ex. 12:21. "Gen. 45:17. Js Isa. 40:1. "Jer. 22:20. " Nah. 3 : 14. " Isa. 47 : 2. ' Jer. 48 : 19. Josh. 16 : 18. Ruth 4:4. 22 Lev. 25 : 30. 23 Ex. 15 : 15. 76] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 115 6. In the occurrence of a, before the laryngeal, in the ^fal Imv. fern. sg. and masc. plur. But it is to be noted that c. In the ^fal Inf. const., the usual o remains; and likewise the ultimate e in the Nif'al and Pi'el Imperfects. Note. As a matter of fact, the laryngeal exerts less influence on a following than on a preceding vowel. 3. The laryngeal prefers compound to simple S*wa; this is seen in the almost universal occurrence of -=r under the second radical in- stead of -j-. 76. Verbs 'y Laryngeal [For full inflection, see Paradigm F] TABULAR VIEW ]e:si. Nir&i. Pi'el. Hirn HWpi'el. Perf. npp nop; np n^ppn HEpnn Impf. niP|T n^i?^ nSjT^ n^p|T- nepn"; Imv. HDp nippn nsp nepn nspnn Jnf aKo niDp nbj:)j D^p nopn Inf. const. nbp HDj^n mp n^Dpn nppnn Part. act. Wp DBp.D n^ppD nppnp Part. pass. mcDp nop: 1. a. npa": (2:5); HS"; (2:7); i;^"> (2:8); n^C/"! (3:22); T]b^ b. y-\V (41:31); ;;212'> (31:53); HpVn^; hW'; J/Sr (12:17) rh^] (8:7); hW'; n^E; [Inf.] (8:10); nOa^ (2:9) j;22/M50:25); ^^^n'; yiliT; mjn"!'; y-linn (45:1) But cf.: J?-)) (1:29); ^/T (3:5); mm'; yj.PlE^P'; a whence the verb gets its name ( 82.). 6. Limed *Alef (^"7), in which the last radical is J^, which fre- quently quiesces ( 83.). Note 1. ^The Weak Verbs were in all probability once Bi-literal Verbs, and should be treated in Chapter XII. They are kept here, however, for the sake of simplicity of presentation to students just entering upon the study of the language. Note 2. A single verb sometimes contains more than one weak radical and so combines characteristics of more than one class. 75. Verbs Pe NUn (|"B) {For full inflection, see Paradigm G, p. 201.] TABULAR VIEW ?:ai. Impf. w, 6. If&l. Impf. w . & Nif ai. Hini. H6ral. Perf. b^; ~ T b^: b^^n Impf. bb^. ^D"! b^^] b^^ Imv. bt: b^ T b^n Inf. abs. ^1D3J T 'b'm T b^n b^n Inf. const. bb} : n^co T b^m b^r\ Part. act. bt2 ^Bj b'^D Part. pass. b)m T T b^: T 1. a. nc^ii^ V JV < 2 Sam. 14 : 10. Ecd. 3 : 2. Ex. 34 : 30. 1. 4 : 6. [ 78 BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 119 b. E^a'; lE^a (45:4); -r\pt[}) (27:26); ^2^^ i?a. Remark.-y3^3*; I'l:^'; ^iDJ?'; iaJ'; ynJ'; l^pi* 2. a. HB"! (2:7); ^Qi (2:8); 1i;an (3:3); inOm'(6:7); b"'3: (18:2). 6. Tan (3:11); ^''^ry (3:13); VS!!! (2:21); Dj5;^ (4:15); -iai(22:20). Remark i.-Dna"""; iDW"; n^J""'; nn^"; qf. ifc^ajn-" Remark 2.-np^ (2:22); Hj?: (2:15); Hj? (6:21); Rp^J'^ nnp (4ill). Remark 3.-innJ (1=29); |n^ (1:17); -|n (14:21); pHJ (41:43);'nD (4:12). Verbs whose first radical is J exhibit the following peculiarities: 1. The loss of J takes place ( 40. 1) when initial and with only a S'wa to sustain it: a. Generally in the ^fal Inf. Const, of verbs whose stem-vowel in the Impf. and Imv. is a; in this case the ending p is taken on in compensation and the form becomes a Segolate. h. In the Jfal Imv. of verbs which have a in the Imperfect. Remark. The ^fal Infinitive and Imperative of verbs with o in the Imperfect do not often lose the initial J. 2. The assimilation of J takes place ( 39. 1) when, having under it a silent 'wa, it closes a preformative syllable, a. In the l^al Imperfect, and Nif'al Perfect and Part. h. Throughout the Hif'il and Hof'al. Note 1. ^The original preformative vowel ii appears in the Hof'al, on account of the sharpened syllable ( 36. 6. a). Note 2. Care must be taken not to confuse with verbs V'Q, (1) those verbs V'B which assimilate ^ ( 80.) or drop it (in Inf. Const, and Imv. %.sl) ; (2) those so-called )J*')J forms which have a 1 2 Sam. 1 : 15. Ex. 3:5. Ps. 144 : 5. Isa. 34 : 4. s Deut. 23 : 23. "2 Sam. 3 : 34. ' Ps. 34 : 14. " Ps. 58 : 7. Hos. 10 : 8. w Isa. 5 : 29. " Jer. 23 : 31. " Lev. 20 : 10. " Jer. 51 : 44. " Isa. 68 : 3. Deut. 31 : 26. 120 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [79 DligeS-forte ( 85.); and (3) the Middle Vowel Nif'al Impf. which also has Dages-forte. Remark 1. ^The ^ remains ww-assimilated in verbs 'y laryngeal, and in a few isolated instances besides. Remark 2. The verb Pip 7 io,^^ treats 7 like J in the J^al and Hof'al, but in the Nif'al (np/J) the 7 is retained. Remark 3. ^The verb |ni is peculiar (1) in its Inf. Const. J^O (= nn=njri), which has as its stem-vowel i, (2) in the appearance of the same vowel 1 changed to e, in the Imv. (JJ^) and Imperf. (|n^), and (3) in the assimilation of the third radical in inflection. 79. Verbs Pe 'Al^f i"^'^) [For full inflection, see Paradigm H, p. 202.] 1. "lai^'l (1:3); b'D^n (2:16); "pDJ^J (3:2); lO^ni (3:2); J - I" I" V J - ^D (3:12). 2. ^Pi^n (2:16). hut ^Di^n (3:6); ^Di^J {Z:2),hvt "p^J^-i (3:6); ^am (1:3). Reinark.-?|^DX(2:17); lO^^ (1:22), /or IDJ^j': '??^5;. (6:21); *1DX1 (10:9). Of the verbs having ^ for their first radical, there are six (see 77.) which show certain peculiarities in the |fal Imperfect: 1. The first radical {^ loses its consonantal character, and the vowel of the preformative, orig. a, is 6 (rounded from a, which was lengthened from a in compensation for the quiescence of {<).^ Note. ^This ^ is retained orthographically, except in the first sing., where it is dropped after the preformative J>5 (= /). 2. The Imperfect stem-vowel is e (from i) in pause; but elsewhere generally a; when the accent recedes, it is e. Remark. Outside of the ^fal Imperfect, these verbs are treated as verbs 'B laryngeal ( 74.). Note. A few verbs are treated sometimes as ^^^D, some- times as 'S laryngeal. > Cf, SxNM.for SxNn (Num. 11 : 25). 80] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 121 80. Verbs Pi J wdw (Yi D) [For full Inflection, see 1 Paradigm I, ] p. 203.1 TABULAR VIEW tfai. Impf. w. e. If&l. Impf. w. &. Nifai. HlfU. H6f&l. Perf. ^Q*) %^ "^CDlJ ^^Dln !?Din Impf. ^Q-i ^D^i ^CDI^ ^IQ^I bor Imv. ^CD ^^1 bein bcDln Inf. abs. ^)^^ ^to^ ^tsln Inf. const. n^D bb^ biD)r\ b^Dln b&n Part. act. yl^^ b^'' ^^DlO Part. pass. ^!|C3* T T VdIj b&D T 1. yT" (4:1) /or j;-!!; n^i (4:18) /or H^l; H^t (4:26). 2. a. ^yi (4:16); 2''''l (4:16); 'h^'\ (4:1). 3E?n (24:55); n^n (3:16); 1^ (18:13); i?T (4:17); !|j;-|1 (3:7). NV (8:16); T|^ (12:1); ^^^ (20:15); ^T (20:7); nn^(4:2); nVT (3:22). 6. |2^11 (2:21); jC^i^'; IKT;'^; E^n^^ (21:10); pX^in-' Remark l.-Hl^ (4:2); HIZ^T; n};^ (3:22); HJ^T; .Tl^.* i^T'; tr"T3'; -JD^^'; nE^3y(8:7); n^py Remark i.-nD'?"; H^E^ (27:19); HTl (45:9); n3n (11:3). T : T : T : t jt Remark S.-np^ (11:31); "^^ (26:16); Tj^Jil (12:4); Tj|?n (3:15). ' 3. a. nlpp (4:18); IHr (32:25); EfllH (45:11); nDIH"; T T "T I IT "hTO. (21:5). Ps. 13 : 4. 2 Gen. 20 : 8. Deut. 1 : 29. Lev. 20 : 24. * Ex. 2 : 4. Isa. 37 : 3. Josh. 22 : 25. Isa. 27 : 11. Isa. 51 : 16. w Deut. 9 : 28. " Num. 22 : 6. " Ps. 2 : 10. 122 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 80 h. yni:'; -i^ij (2i:3); n^^in (ii:27); ]Tb)r\ (5:4); n^i^i (5:3). c. -i-)in(39:i); nj^2in'; ^31^' - T : J- - 4. ;;^V^/; j;^^' p*^M28:i8); ni^ns- n^i?(T; in\m Verbs whose first radical was originally ) exhibit the following peculiarities: 1. The original ) passes over into ^ ( 44. 1. a) whenever it would be initial, as in the K!al, Pi'el and Pu'al Perfects and Inf. Abs., the J^al Part., and the strong form of the If al Inf. Const. ; and frequently also after the prefix pri ( 44. 1. b). 2. In the l^al Imperfect, Imperative and Inf. Const., two treat- ments exist, according as the radical ) (or ^) is rejected or retained: a. In those verbs which reject the radical ), (1) the Imperfect has for its stem-vowel e (from i), or (before laryngeals) a, while the preformative takes unchangeable ^ in compensation for the loss of ^. (2) the Imperative has the same vowel as the Imperfect; (3) the Infinitive construct, taking on the ending J^ '^^ com- pensation {cf. verbs J"Sj 78. a), assumes the form of an a-class Segolate noun H^D ifoi' H/COj 89.). 6. In those verbs which retain the radical ), the Imperfect has for its stem-vowel a, while the ), changed to ^, unites with the vowel (i) of the preformative and gives i. Note. Only three verbs retain T (^) in the Imperative, and these are verbs which have no third radical. Remark 1. The Inf. Const, has most frequently the form H/CO i r\/^)f before suffixes R^CD; several cases, however, occur of the form H/COj the form ^Q*' is found a few times, while n /CD^ seldom occurs. Remark 2. Seemingly for compensation, the Imperative often assumes the cohortative ending H ( ^^O- Ex. 2 : 14. 2 Ps. 45 : 16. Isa. 18 : 7. Isa. 58 : 5. Isa. 14:11. Isa. 9:17. ^jer. 11:16. Josh. 8:8. nnj, Nn\ r\y, cf. also the pausal form rtfy_ (Deut. 33:23). 81] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 123 Remark 3. ^The verb TOil '^o,lk forms its Kal Imperf., Imv. and Inf. Const, and its Hif . Perf . and Imperf. on the analogy of the Pe WS,w verb. Remark 4. The verb HD? ^^^ follows the analogy of this class of verbs in its Imperative and Inf. Const, ^fal where 7 is dropped. In J^al Imperf. it assimilates 7 as some Pe Wlw verbs treat ) and as J is regularly treated in Pe Niin verbs. 3. The first radical {)), when medial, remains; but a. It appears as a consonant only when it would be doubled, as in the Nif'al Imperf., Imv. and Inf. Const. (44. 5 c). b. It unites with the preformative vowel a, and forms ] (a+w= 6), in the Nif'Sl Perfect and Participle, and throughout the Hif'il ( 44. 3. a). c. It unites with the preformative vowel u, and forms ) throughout theHofal (44. 3. e). Note. ^The form 7^^^ (from 73^ be able) is regarded by some - T as a regular Hof'al Imperf.; by others, as a ^al Passive Imperf. 4. In a few verbs YQ, the ^ { = )) is assimilated, just as J of verbs |"S ( 78.) was assimilated. 81, Verbs Pe Y6d (Vg) [For full inflection, see Paradigm I, p. 202.1 TABULAR VIEW ?:ai. Nirai. Hifii. H6fai. Perf. ^^\ ^^!p^^ Impf. ^Q^'; No ^'P^! No Imv. forms ^ip'n forms Inf. abs. b)^\ occur. ^iP'D occur. Inf. co^ist. b'^\ h^^^n Part. ^qS ^^CD^O 124 * ELEMENTS OF BEBBEW [ 82 1. 2B''": 02:13); Y)T'5 (9=24) /or ypl']; HD"';! (34:18); Ip^n-' 2. 3lpin (12:16); n|Trn (21:7); nnC^n^ D"'p"'n (4:7); pm'; 3^Q^K (32:13); ^TDH^ nn^C?^XU32:10); 213\n (32:13); 2^13^^^; D^p^P^ HprO-' Verbs whose first radical was originally ^ exhibit the following pe- culiarities: 1. In the !^al Imperfect the radical ^ unites with the vowel of the preformative (i) and gives i ( 30. 2. o). No forms of an Imperative occur. 2. In the Hif'il the radical ^ unites with the vowel of the preforma- tive (a) and gives 6 ( 30. 4. b). Note. No Nif'al or Hof'al forms occur. 82, Verbs Y^ or V'^, called H"^ [For full inflection, see Paradigm K, p. 204 ] TABULAR VIEW ?:ai. Nirai. prei. Pu'ai. Hini. mopa'ei. perf. ni^p^ nopi n^p nep n^pn ntppnn impf. nE})Tn!p|T n^p] n^p] nD|T ntppn"; imv. nipp njppn n^p nigpn ntspnn inf.abs. nbD^^^P^ nbp|__ ^^^^ Inf. const, nmp nlCDpn ntep niBp nmpn ntepnn Part. Part. act. pass. ntppD HDpp nopj ntppp nE)pnp 1. a. ^^^ ( :2:10); np2;n (2:6); s Jar. 1 : 12. 1 Sam. 16 : 17. nb (18:33); T Ex. 2 : 7. ' Ex. 2 : 7. T : T : T Isa. 66 : 11. sjer. 4:22. Esth. 2:6. Isa. 23 : 16. 1 Kgs. 6 : 7. 82] BY AN INDUCrrVB METHOD 125 b. n\1"' (1:29); ,1^ (2 = 6); r^Dii (24:45); n32N (30:3); c. HE'vd:"); nvi(4:2); r^DD': n3D'; nxne^D (24:21). Reinark.-nfe^J?'; nf\ (4=2); nJ3-' 'n'; nn^ia (45:i9); n^^nn-"' T J" : T J" : I' T J" .. T < .. r J" : T b. Dn"'^-l1 (3:5); p^p}} (3:14); ip^Jp (4:1); n^BH"; n^inne'iT^; but c/. n^b;?n" i n"'^i;n"; tids'^ T J- -: I- : T J" "v:iv t j- "vriv j- andi^VOy^; iniia" a''''n""lV (3:17). c. r-inn (41:36); rpE?ni (19:33); nj^E^^^n"'; nrE'yn"; nj^n2.' 4. nn^^(l:2); nnc;v(27:iv); nn-i(38:i4); nnxij(9:i4); T : IT T IT T T -: IT T ": : nn:Dn"; nn^3"; nnpE^'n (24:46). t::* t:* tJit:* 2. Before vowel-additions, the radical ^ is usually lacking, together with its preceding vowel; it appears, however, in pausal and em- phatic forms. 3. Before consonant-additions, the radical ^ unites with the pre- ceding stem-vowel, always a, forming the diphthongal ay, which appears as a. e (^__) in the Perfects of the passive stems (rarely it is ^ ) ; 6. i (^__), thinned from e, generally in the Perfects of active stems, though Pi'el and Hif'il stems very frequently have ^ ; c. e (''__.), contracted from ay, in Imperfects and Imperatives. 4. The Perfect 3 sg. fem. of all stems lacks the third radical (^) and takes the old feminine ending fl^* to which H is added. Note. This H is probably the usual feminine ending, added after the analogy of other verbs. Deut. 32 : 37. Isa. 41 : 5. Isa. 33 : 7. Isa. 21 : 12. 6 Ex. 15 : 5. Deut. 8 : 13. ^ Ezek. 32 : 2. Deut. 27 : 9. Isa. 14 : 10. w Ex. 26 : 30. " Ex. 17 : 5. Deut. 4 : 19. " Ex. 32 : 7. h Ex. 33 : 1. is Ezek. 31 : 15. ^ Ps. 32 : 5. " Deut. 3 : 21. is Deut. 1 : 44. Lev. 4:2. 20 2 Sam. 1 : 24. M Jer. 49 : 24. 2 Hos. 11:6. 82] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 127 5. a. by for nby, w /<" nia; nnn' m ann m na-in; p]*i.n' /or snn /or nsnn; ^yn' /or n^jfn- 6. (1) ns'i': sipn-' (2) HE/'I (9:21); >j|2l (27:38); niZ^Jjtl (24:46). (3) |3;:l (2:22); 3-;"> (1:22); |Br; -1|TV; jp^'.l (33:19). (4) jDnV"; jDill"; i^npll (3:6); anni (43:34). i5)y^^X (4:4); nnni (4:1); IH'T (4:5); t^^i^ (1:7); E:r;;n (22:12). (6) ^3n''; n'1 (12:7); J^n^V" T Tj"- T IT (7) by) (2:2); )^^) (2:16); |pi1; )'^^y'; ^^m (9:21). (8) p2;>1 (29:10); npi (9:27); |D^1. 5. Forms lacking any representation of the third radical are found as follows : a. Without i^__ in the Pi'el, Hif il and Hi^pa'el Imperatives; in Hif'il forms, a helping -r- or ^^ is often inserted. b. Without n ill the Imperfect when used as a Jussive, or with Wiw Conversive ( 69. 6, 70. (1) the verbal form may stand without change; or (2) it may have the vowel of the preformative modified; or (3) it may receive the helping-vowel -7-; or (4) it may receive the helping-vowel -7-, and also have the vowel of the preformative modified; (5) in laryngeal forms -^ is employed as the helping-vowel; (6) in the Nif'al there is no further change; (7) in the Pi'el and Hi^pa'el there is naturally the absence of the characteristic Dages-forte; (8) in the Hif 'il the helping vowel -y is frequently employed, in which case the -=- of the preformative is deflected to e ( 36. 2). 1 Ps. 119 : 18. 2 Deut. 3 : 28. Judg. 20 : 38. Deut. 9 : 14. Ex. 8 : 1. Job 31 : 27. ' Num. 21 : 1. 8 Ex. 2 : 12. Ruth 2 : 3. w 1 Kgs. 10 : 13. Deut. 2:1. i Isa. 47 : 3. w Ex. 6 : 3. "Jon. 2:1. Deut. 3 : 18. Judg. 15 : 4. 128 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW I83 83. Verbs L&mdd *Alif (H"^) [For full inflection, see Paradigm N. p. 210.] TABULAR VIEW ^&i. mm. prei. Hrrn. HWp&'el. Perf. !?P DpJ i|inp''/ 6. ^^py-> ?)a^'; '^W''-'' "^^^P^V' C?*?^"!?'"!i^-' 3. a. nX-lp (17:19); -"nXna (6:7); UK^D (26:32); Dn^yO-' b. n^D'; "Tli^^D"'; "TlX-li (3i:3i); Dn^l""'; nUit"; T J" T J" T J"T V : T J" T c. njxnpn (2f.pi.y'; njnpn & f. plv-, T jv - : Remark l.-HXa (24:11) for nXa: nXE* (36:7) or nXE^ (4:7) /or HKC;. 20. Deut. 28 : 10. s 1 Kgs. 18 1 12. Job 36 : 17. " Esth. 4 : 11. " 1 Sam. 19 : 2. " Ex. 2 : 16. 2 Isa. 58 : 12. Deut. 4 : 37. "Jer. 6: 11. " Ex. 29 : 36. Ps. 89 : 27. 1 Sam. 2 : 29. " Deut. 5 : 5. " Ezek. 5 : 11. Ruth 1 : 20, 21. " Ruth 4 : 17. Deut. 1 : 31. Judg. 14 : 12. " Ps. 5 : 6. " Josh. 17 : 15. MRuth 1:20. 83] BT AN IKDUCTIVB METHOD 129 Remark 2.-!|j3'/ooj3; Dn3n:^; TiDa'; r\iwr\-' JT JT :- J" T T.V Remark 3.-!lJ"pBy; -i^t^; nD)i' for m^D^i ^2)1'; Verbs whose third radical is J^ exhibit the following peculiarities: 1. Final ^ always quiesces ( 43. 1); this does not affect any pre- ceding vowel except a, which, in an open syllable, then becomes ,, as in the ^f al Perf ., Imperf . and Imv. ; throughout the Pu'al and Hof 'al forms, and in the Nif'al Perfect. Note. The ^fal Imperf. and Imv. have ^ for their stem-vowel, after the analogy of verbs '7 laryngeal ( 76.). 2. Medial {i^ is treated as a consonant (larynge), a. Before all vowel-additions. 6. Before the w^ which precedes the suffixes ?], 23, p. 3. Medial J^ quiesces (i. e., loses its consonantal character) before all consonant-additions, the preceding vowel becoming o. -r-, rounded from a, in the J^al Perfect (active). b. -n-, lowered from i, in the J^al Perfect (stative), and in the remaining Perfects. Note. This use of e in the Perfects parallels the usage in n' / verbs ( 82.). c. -V- (^), after the analogy of the H' / verb, in the Imperfects and Imperatives. Remark 1. In addition to instances indicated under 3 (above), X shows a tendency to become silent in many isolated cases. Remark 2. J^, losing its consonantal character, is frequently dropped. Remark 3. There are numerous examples of verbs {^"7 with the inflection of verbs Pl' / ( S2.), there being an evident confusion, in many cases, of the one class with the other. 1 1 Sam. 25 : 8. 2 Josh. 2:16. Judg. 4 : 19. Ruth 1 : 14. Job 18: 3. Ps. 32:1. ^ Ruth 2 : 9. sps. 89:11. Jer. 29 : 10. XII. Bi-literal Verbs 84. Classes of Bi-literal Verbs 1. I^j? (8:8); )2p\ (8:1); ;;T (21:12); bm (29:20); IH (3:22). 2. n!)C^l (3:15); ^^2'' (38:11); 22^ (18:33); n^E^n (3:19); I T T T T The Semitic vocabulary in general and the Hebrew in particular are predominantly tri-literal; i. e., words are, for the most part, made upon the basis of three radical consonants. Hebrew grammars have long taught that all Hebrew words might be explained upon the tri-literal basis; and many still so teach. But it now appears to be true that originally, not only in the Semitic languages as a whole, but also in Hebrew, there were two kinds of words, those organized as tri-literals, and those organized as hi-literals. But the tendency of the lan- guage was toward tri-literality. The bi-literals gradually yielded to this influence and sought in various ways to achieve tri-literality, or its equivalent, for themselves. Some carry the marks of their bi- literal origin more plainly visible than do others. It is probable indeed that all of the Weak Verbs were originally of the bi-literal order; but for the sake of convenience they have been treated here as tri-literals. But there are two classes of verbs which from every point of view are best treated frankly as bi-literals. These are: 1. The 'Ay in-doubled {^'')J) verb, the main characteristic of which is the doubling of the second radical. Note. An accurate name for this class awaits discovery. ^Ayin must here be understood as designating the second radical, rather than the middle radical, since these roots have only two con- sonants. 2. The Middle-Vowel verbs, commonly called 'Ayin W,w {X)J) and 'Ayin Yod (V'j;). Note. ^The name "Middle-Vowel verb" is chosen here rather for convenience than for accuracy. 130 85] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 131 85. The 'Aytn-Doubied Verb [For full inflection, see Paradigm L, p. 206.1 TABULAR VIEW :&i. Nirai. Hifll. Perf. (Dp JDDp m 2p^ 23pn opn Impf. Dpi. ^iT, Imv. Dp Dpn ^PO Inf. abs. DiDp Dpn ' Dpn ^pn Inf. const. Dp C2pn ^PO Part. act. Dpp ^po Part. pass. DIDp C3pJ Hof'al: Pf. DpIH; Impf. Dpi"'; Part. Dp=l 1. a. !|3E^"i (8:1); nSI (18:20); ISDJ (19:4); n^n.T; '3Dn'; J T T AT J- T T J" J" T n3DD'; 30^^ 3D:.' h. Dl"!"; 301'; n'3'; DH^ (47:15); ^ibs^'; npi (24:26). Reinark.-3D:"'; DHl": IH?!"; isn": ri3^" 2. a. ^b (11:9); pH (33:5); hb^ (29:3); 6^rf^; miJ.'' h. hh\\"; yah"; 33to''; 1112/'; inE^-" c. '?bl'^^; nlns^^^; 3bp^^^ DDH^"; DDE^n^'; 33>>V" 1 Judg. 20 : 40. 6 Num. 34 : 4. Job 24 : 24. " Ex. 23 : 21. Deut. 21 : 20. Judg. 5 : 27. Isa. 47 : 14. 2 Cant. 6 : 5. Ps. 30 : 13. 10 Ex. 13 : 18. " Isa. 24 : 12. 18 Prov. 30 : 27. 22 Isa. 10 : 6. a>Mic.6:13. Ex. 28: 11. T 1 Sam. 5 : 8. 11 2 Kgs. 22 : 4. Ex. 15 : 10. i 2 Kgs. 6 : 15. 2 Jer. 47 t 4. " Job H : 12. 1 Kgs. 7 : 15. 8 Deut. 9 : 21. 12 Deut. 1 : 44. M Isa. 10 : 31. 20 Mic. 2 : 4. M Num. 21 : 4. 132 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 85 One group of bi-literal verbs sought to approximate tri-literality by strengthening the consonantal element of the root. As a rule, the second radical was therefore doubled whenever possible. The vowel used before this doubled consonant was the same as that found as characteristic stem-vowel in the corresponding forms of the tri- literal strong verb. 1. a. The second radical is regularly doubled, except when final, throughout the J^ed, Nif'al, Hif'il and Hof'al stems. b. Some verbs double the first instead of the second radical in the J^al Imperf. This is the regular form in Aramaic for these verbs; this form of the Imperf. therefore is commonly called the Aramaic Imperf. Remark. Such forms occur sporadically in the Hif'il and Hof'al. 2. Certain forms of the Jfal, Nif'al, Hif'il and Hof'al become fully tri-literal by writing the second radical twice and vocalizing as in the tri-literal strong verb. These are: a. The K.al Perfect of verbs denoting action or movement in all the forms of the 3d pers. b. The J^sd Participles and Infin. Absol. The naturally long vowels of these forms made any other method of strengthening them impossible. c. A few sporadic forms. 3. a. ini^'a'; 'ni2p^; nl3p'; Til^p:*; nisE^n*; ni2pn'; 6- n:i3Dn (37:7); n:"'^nni (4i:54); nj^'Van-' T ^v .. : T wv : - T jv : c. Dnl3DV; nl3p1D'; [DDtepi; DHtepni. 4. o. nJ^2Dn (37:7); iJ^D^'"; IpHS"; ^sn''; iJ3Dn"; V : 6. no'V^ i:n"; i^i" (but -tii)." tjt- t 'T *a Josh. 5:9. 2 1 Sam. 22 : 22. Ex. 40 : 3. 2 Sam. 6 : 22. Job 16 : 7. 1 Kgs. 18 : 37. 1 Sam. 3:11. Josh. 6 : 3. Ezek. 41 : 24. w Ps. 49 : 6. " Pror. 8 : 27. " Jer. 27 : 8. " Ps. 139 : 13. " Deut. 7:7. Ruth 3 : 15. w Jer. 31 : 7. w Isa. 54 : 1. w Isa. 12 : 6. " Ezek. 1:9. Ezek. 22 : 26. 85] BT AN INDtrcTIVE METHOD 133 d. ^nn (6:1); br\D'; 3DD'; ^2Dn'; nlBE^H*; nr^nn (41:54); nj"'^an^ "pn"! 0:20) ^nrw T .V : T JV : V .T - V iT - 3. When terminations beginning with a consonant are attached to forms containing a doubled second radical, a separating vowel is in- serted to make it possible to retain the doubling of the radical. a. The forms in the perfect take 6 as the separating vowel. b. The Imperfect takes 6 ) before the termination HJ* T c. The separating vowels regularly carry the tone except before the heavy terminations QH and Jp . Note. ^The origin of these separating vowels is not clear, but the probability is that they arose after the analogy of the H' / verb forms. 4. The following variations from the form of the stem-vowel as it appears in corresponding forms of the tri-literal strong verb are found: a. The original ii regularly appears in the !^al Imperf., Inf., and Imperative, whenever the tone leaves the root-syllable by reason of the addition of affixes or suffixes. b. The original u is deflected to 6 in the J^al Imperf. when the tone recedes to the preformative upon the addition of Waw-conversive; and frequently also in cases covered by 4 a. c. In the Nif'al Imperf. and Imv., where e appears in the strong verb, the original a is retained unchanged. d. In the Hif 'il stem throughout, the attenuated i is not length- ened to i as in the strong verb, but (1) is lowered to e when it has the tone; (2) is retained as i when it loses the tone by reason of the addition of affixes or suffixes, and (3) is deflected to e when the tone recedes on account of w&w-conversive. Note. A naturally long vowel before a doubled consonant is contrary to usage in Hebrew, being rarely, if ever, found. Jer. 25 : 29. Jer. 21 : 4. Cant. 6:5. Job 16 : 7. 1 Sam. 3:11. Judg. 13 : 25. 134 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 85 5. a. 20"", bnt nr3Dn (37:7); ^DJ^ hid U^C^:'; DDJ^ but ij3p^V; Dpn=; 'pnn.' 6. Dsn; 2b"!'; n'^l"'; ''^2n ilan"; plan plan." c. ^nn (6:1); bm''; "JnVpn"; n's2;n"; "'nisE^nv' Remark.-'?p^ (16:5); 0^"]^'; nHV" d. ^mn (4:26); 1^)^'^ nl2D1D." - T - 5. Certain variations occur in the vowel of the preformative syllable from the vowel forms in the corresponding places in the strong verb. These are: a. In the regular ^al Imperf., the Nif al Perf. and Part., and the Hif'il Imperf. and Imv., the original a of the preformative syllable is rounded to , when pretonic, but is reduced to S*wa when the tone moves farther away. b. In the Nif'al Imperf., Imv., and Infins. and in the so-called Aramaic Imperf. of the l^Sil, the a of the preformative is attenuated to i in the unaccented sharpened syllable and remains without further change. c. In the Hif'il Perf. and Part, the original a of the preforma- tive is attenuated to i and then lowered to e when pretonic; but when the tone moves away original a is reduced to compound S'wa (^r). Remark. ^The intransitive Iff al Imperf. with a as stem-vowel also has e in the preformative syllable, but probably here it arises from an original i. d. The preformative ii of the Hof. stem regularly lengthens to il. This is probably due to the influence of the Middle-Vowel verb ( 86.). Remark. ^Frequently forms appear with u unchanged and the first radical doubled; e. g., 13 ^H-^" ilKgs. 7:15. Num. 34:4. Mic. 2:4. 2Chr. 14:6. Ezek. 47 : 2. 2 Sam. 5 : 23. ' Deut. 2 : 24. Ps. 68 : 3. 1 Sam. 5:8. w Ps. 30 : 13. " Isa. 24 : 3. " Jer. 25 : 29. " 2 Sam. 19 : 44. " Job 16 : 7. Num. 17 : 20. " Deut. 19 : 6. w Isa. 7:8. m Hos. 10 : 14. Ezek. 41 : 24. m Job 24 : 24. 85] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 135 6. a. ppno (49:10); ^|?ioy; ^nooini'; laa-in^ (25:22); : : T : J- unononn (43:10). : AT : - : >|T"; ^^Sn^ (20:7); riDSI"; 7. See forms cited under 3 a, b, c, 4 a, d, 5 a, c. 8. 'r\2b'', for s^b; 'ipmy'jor ipn3; r^pm (27:21), for r^pm-, l^-^^^Jorp^ 1)^1", for lE^i; y)-\\",for y'T. 6. The Intensive Stems assume special forms in these verbs. These are: a. The Polel stem, as active intensive, with its reflexive HWpoleL h. The Poldl stem, as passive of the Polel, with its reflexive Hi^polal. c. The Pflpel stem appears as an active intensive in a few verbs. Note. These stems serve both for this verb and for the Middle- Vowel verb (86.). In the Polel and Polal forms, the double writing of the 2d radical gives the desired tri-literality; and to express the intensive idea, the vowel of the penult is lengthened (and rounded) in place of another doubling of the 2d radical. In the Pilpel, the entire bi-literal root is doubled. d, A few verbs write the 2d radical twice and make intensive stems from this lengthened root exactly as in the tri-literal verb proper. These are forms that developed late. 7. The tone generally stays upon the stem-syllable. As a rule, it Ps. 90 : 6. Ps. 131 : 2. Judg. 10 : 8. Ps. 74 : 13. Lam. 1 : 12. Isa. 53 : 5, Isa. 24 : 19. Eccl. 10 : 10. Jer. 51 : 25. w Isa. 29 : 4. " Jer. 51 : 58. " 2 Sam. 6 : 14. " Ps. 10 : 3. " Ps. 104 : 35. " Lev. 20 : 9. Isa. 1 : 6. " Isa. 65 : 20. " Ecd. 9:1. " Prov. 8 : 29. Prov. 29 : 6. M Ps. 91 : 6. M Isa. 42 : 4. 136 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [86 leaves that syllable only when the separating vowels are used or when pronominal suffixes are added. 8. The forms of this verb sometimes exchange with similar forms of the Middle-Vowel verb ( 86.). 86 . The Middle-Vowel Verb [For full inflection, see Paradigm M, ] p. 208.1 TABULAR VIEW J^M. Nif&l. Middle H. Middle %. Hiru. Hf&l. Perf. i''P 1 b^; Mpj ^'pO ^pin Impf. Imv. bijT by^ b^. bpv Inf. abs. bsp bp bspr\ 1 bsp^ "^pO Inf. const. hp b^p bipn ' ^^pn ^pin Part. act. s? l^P ^'po Part. pass. b^p ^'p l^'P bipj ^pio 1. a. ne? (18:33); nnp'; ""nnE^'; Dmo'; no*; na-i=^; T dT T Remark.-nn (42:38); ^IX (44:3); ^^^2^ DlCD^; inp(7:22). h. ^^S^^ (17:12); ^ll^H (17:10); pDJ (41:32); ^jlDJ (41:33); ly'Dj (10:18); Dnb*pJ^^ "TiiiDJ"; ^r\m:^>' 2 Sam. 12 : 21. 1 Sam. 2 : 1. Deut. 5 : 30. Zech. 1 : 16. Ruth 1 : 15. w Ezek. 20 : 43. Mai. 2 : 8. 1 Chr. 21 : 20. " Isa. 50 : 5. Deut. 9 : 12. Jer. 48 : 39. 12 Ps. 38 : 9. 86] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 137 c. NiT (32:9); Ef^3y; -^^X^^; in^:'; DlW (34:15). d. Kinn (4:4); ^-itJ^H (14:16); T^^H (1:17); QlpX (17:21); 2112^1 (50:15); D''pD (9=9); D'^pH^^ "'OPpn (^^^^^J i:tl"'E'n (44:8); DpH (38:8); ^E^H (50:15); ^fi^n (24:8); D^ (4:3); nJ3tS'n'; DD'V; nopHV; nb^nr; n3n (20:9); ^nxnni (27:12). e. nD] (38:11); D^E^n (3:19); Dip (13:17); y\^ (31:3); niD (19:2); HID: (42:2); HJap': HJ^e'-"' J T T I f ^ T : J Remark.-D'-|y'; DE^^'; IJn"; Ypn"; Dp_''U4:8); Y^l (18:2); D2;'1 (26:18); n:!'! (20:1); D^l (39:12); nJ^t^nV" T JT- TJT- T .T- T : J T - /. D"'E'M30:42); n^2/{<( (3:15); pT (49:16); |1^^ (24:23); Remark.-n^"; ^:|12; D2'"'"; DE''! (2:8); HE^'I (30:40); g. 22;''; 31^; nop"; D^Dp'; Dp"; QX^-^' T T T I T |t Jt T The Middle-Vowel verb is a bi-literal verb which seeks to approxi- mate tri-literality, mainly by emphasizing the characteristic stem- vowel. Hence 1. Wherever the stem-vowel is characteristic of the form, it be- comes naturally long, if the consonantal environment permits. a. The a of the |f al Perf . becomes a, except before terminations beginning with a consonant. Remark. Stative verbs have e or 6 in the ^al Perf. Isa. 29 : 22. 2 Sam. 2 : 32. 2 Kgs. 12 : 9. Num. 7:1. Job 20 : 10. Judg. 2 : 16. Ex. 26 : 30. Num. 31 : 28. Isa. 32 : 9. w Ruth 1 : 8. " Nmn. 24 : 7. " Judg. 7 : 3. Jer. 16 : 5. "Prov. 3:11. 1 Sam. 7 : 14. Ps. 19 : 13. " Ps. 5 : 2. 18 Prov. 23 : 1. iJer. 9:11. Ps 13:6. 1 Sam. 22 : 15. " 1 Sam. 3 : 8. Jer. 30 : 18. M Jer. 49 : 9. MIc. 7 : 6. M 2 Sam. 18 : 31. Hos. 10 : 14. Judg. 4 : 21. 138 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 86 b. The original a of all Nif 'al forms is lengthened to & and rounded too. Note. This 6 gives way to il in some forms of the Perf., for the sake of euphony. c. The same change to 6 takes place in certain verbs having a as the original stem-vowel of the l^al Imperf. d. The original a of the Hif 'il attenuates to i, which lengthens to i in all forms except the Inf. Abs., the Imv. 2d sing, masc, the Jus- sive form of the Imperf., the Imperf. with W&w-conversive, sometimes in the Imperf. before the ending H J > ^^^ '^^ some exceptional forms. T Note. The i in Hif'il of the tri-literal strong verb is probably due to the influence of this i in the Middle-Vowel verb. e. An original ii is lengthened to 2n (4:4); y^^n (14:16); D"")?!? (9:9); D^pn'; P]^Jn'; ^nppn(6:18); inbin (14:22); T)1K12n"'; d. See examples cited under 1 c above. 3. The vowel of the preformative syllable, when the latter is open, necessarily imdergoes change: a. The original a rounds to & when pretonic, and is reduced to S*;d when ante-pretonic, in the |fal Imperf., Nif'al Perf. and Part., Hif'il Imperf., Imv., and Infinitives. 6. The original a attenuates to i in the Nif'al Imperf., Imv., and Infinitives, and remains without further change in the sharpened syllable, just as in the tri-literal strong verb in the corresponding forms. Isa. 42 : 17. Job 20 : 10. Isa. 50 : 5. Ps. 38 : 9. Deut. 1 : 13. Ezek. 38 : 7. ? Ex. 16 : 7. Josh. 4 : 9. Lev. 14 : 12. " Ezek. 27 : 26. 2 Chr. 15 : 16. 140 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 86 c. The original a of the Hif il Perf. and Part, is attenuated to 1 and lowered to e when pretonic, but is reduced to S'wd when ante- pretonic. d. In the preformative of the J^al Imperf ., with a as stem-vowel (1 c above) of some intransitive verbs original i imdergoes the same changes as the attenuated i of the preformative of the Hif'il Perfect. 4. 2E^in (42:28); plH'; DpI.T: r\DV'; ny-. 3E^=lSn (43:12); ^^W. "IDID-' 5. a. r|Dli?i (1:20); pl3'; nJJlD'; ptt^'; |Jl3nN." b. 1JJ13"; nbVin'^; lE'E'an^ (2:24); n1^n^" IT T : IT IT : |T : c. ^5^D^ (47:12); ^H^^bl (45:11); b^?"; I^D^S": 4. The Hof'al stem, having its characteristic vowel in the pre- formative syllable, naturally strengthens that vowel rather than the stem-vowel. Consequently u is lengthened to ii ()), which is of course without further change. The inflection is otherwise as in the strong verb. 5. The Middle-Vowel verb, having no middle radical to double, forms its intensive stems in a different way. a. The intensive actives, corresponding to the Pi'el and Hi^pa'el of tri-literal verbs, are known as the Polel and Hidpolel. b. The corresponding intensive passive is known as the Poldl. Note. ^For an explanation of the origin of these forms, see 85. c. Some Middle-Vowel verbs make an intensive stem by simply doubling the bi-Hteral root as a whole and vocalizing the resulting form like a regular tri-literal Pi'el, etc. These forms are known as the PUpelf PUpdl, and Htdpdlpel. 1 Isa. 30 : 33. Ex. 40 : 17. Num. 15 : 35. Lev. 4 : 10. Ex. 10 : 8. Isa. 17:1. Ps. 9:8. Ps. 99 : 4. Isa. 62 : 7. " Job 23 : 15. Ps. 67 : 23. " Job 15 : 7. " Prov. 24 : 3. " Jer. 20 : 9. w 1 Kgs. 20 : 27. Esth. 4 : 4. " Isa. 22 : 17. m Esth. 9 : 31. " Esth. 9 : 27. Ps. 119 : 106. "Ps. 119:28. *Buth4:7. 86] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 141 d. PVel forms of Middle-Vowel verbs are found only in the later literature. These were probably made after the analogy of genuine Middle-W&w verbs, such as jy\V> b))}> HIV' ^^^ 6. QEf') (8:3); ^^3 (7:9); ^r\D (7:22); !|aDi (10:18); J|Vb^ (34:24); "n'Opn (6:18); ""nblH (14:22); HrilE'ri'; 7. pi (49:16); D''E'", (30:42); n"'l^K (3:15); p^^ (24:23); Remark.-!!:^'; ^ni:^2'; nl2n.' 8. 13" (from 1)2; as if from ^2); -)aj" (for nlD3, from 1!)D; - T IT T T as if from -no); iSlT/' (from QH; asif from QO'l); yO]^* (fromi^lD). 6. The tendency of the Middle-Vowel verb being to stress the stem-vowel, the tone naturally stays upon this strengthened vowel wherever possible. It loses the tone only when (a) the endings QJ<^ and |p are added, which carry the tone; or (6) the separating vowels 6 or 6 are used, which always carry the tone themselves ex- cept before Qfl and jfj ; or (c) in forms with Wi,w-conversive, etc., in which the stem-vowel was never strengthened. 7. Middle-e verbs differ from Middle-il only in the !lg^al Imperf., Imv. and Inf. Const., and sometimes in the 5al Passive Part., in all of which i appears instead of u. Remark. ^A few Middle-^ verbs seem to show a characteristic form of the ^al Perf. with i instead of a. But these forms are per- haps better considered as Hiftb with the preformative dropped. 8. Since the Middle-Vowel verb and the so-called 'Ayin-doubled verb are fundamentally the same, it is natural that the two should often interchange forms. As a matter of fact, the same root some- Ezek. 16 : 55. Isa. 60 : 8. Ezek. 20 : 43. < Ps. 6 : 2. Prov. 23:1. 'Ps. 2:11. Jer. 16:16. Dan. 9 : 2. Job 33 : 13. w Zech. 4 : 10. " Jer. 48 : 11. Ezek. 10 : 15, 17. M Mic. 2 : 6. 142 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW t87 times develops two sets of forms, one with strengthening of con- sonants, the other with strengthening of vowels, e. g., ]J)2 and ^3; - T ^^ly and *l*iy, etc. More often, only sporadic forms of a second - T development appear. 87, A. Comparative View of the Verb Forms 1. THE KAL perfect AND IMPERFECT Perfect. Impf. with 6. Impf. with &, Impf. with e. Active Stative 'B laryng. y laryng. '7 laryng. I'D TD n'b I'M [ ^'^P nop - T - T - T Dipp tap Nisp bp (4) [ya^tul] [yafetal] btvy Dp: by. 13 - v: IV npp^ b^^_ biD^'' 25p'. (6) yp! [ya^tii] bbf}] ^Dpi (bop:) ^(T 1 Or Soy: ; also Vo];.''.. Jussive and with Waw-convers. io pause. < Also Vap>. Only in verbs y^o and 'y laryng, Only in jnv 5871 BY AN INDITCTIVE METHOD 143 2. THE p!'EL and PC*AL PERFECTS AND IMPERFECTS Pi' el Perfect. Pii'&l Perfect. Prsi Impf. Ptt'&l Impf. [Ifattal]) [tuttai] Strong b^p. b^p' b^p 'D laryng. b^lJ b^:} 'j; laryng. b^p.bnp b^p, ^nj!) [yksttsi] ^pr [ytuttai] '^laryng. HDp' I'D b^: niDp bis: b^^ - \ nep^/ i^'b mp mp c?p^ mp\ r\"b mp mp n^pl ^^p\ V'v c:e?p CDBp COEppi ^^p\ V"V COEpIp' CJDip 23ip1p' CODlp^ v')3 ^p:^p' COpPp^ xy bY TV bpbp' ^^1p 1 , I ?'p^ ^^ip^ 3. THE HlF'lL AND h6F'AL PERFECTS AND IMPERFECTS Hif'U Perf. H6f&l Perf. Hlfil Impf. HOfai Impf. Strong 'D laryng. ')} laryng. '7 laryng. [hattai] b^ppn ^'pn n^ppn [hulftai] b^pn en)" 7pn nepn [ya^tai] ^'Ppl n^Bp: [yu^tai] bm ^*?p'i n!?p^ Forms with a under the second radical are quite frequent. * In pause n^p. P6*el. * Pflpel. Rare. P61el. 1 Also Vnpv 'In pause nt3p>. Also Snp\ w Also S^B^n. i There are a few forms like Sttpn. " Also Sbj7"^ " Also S>b;>^ 144 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [87 Hlf'U Perf. H6f'&l Perf. Hlf -n Imperf. H6f'&l Imperf. YD [haktal] b^m b^^'in [huktal] b^n [yaijtai] [yaktai] b^^ - \ b^v YQ b^iD^n ^ipii K"^ N^ppn NDpn T J: T ^P)?- ^Wr n'b nippn n^pn n^j?! ^Wr CDpin bp'in 2:pv ^pv 4. THE NIF'AL ANDHIGPA'EL PERFECTS AND IMPERFECTS mtU Perf. Nlf- &1 Impf. 1 HIp&. Perf. Hiep&. Impf. [nattai] [yiWfat&i] [hid^attal] [yieksttau Strong blDpl ^!?P^.' ^cspnn ^C3pn"' 'Slaryng.^Djjr ^i?^: ^23;?nn ^?3^n^ 'i;laryng. ^^pj ^^p;. bapnn' 1 T : ^5!!ipnT* '^laryng.nippj nDp"" nispnn nepni I'D ^2d: - |t- TD bc:lJ ^Dr ^"^ K9p: 2?p^ XDpnn ^E?pr"! n"^ nippj nipp^. HBpnn J?";; CDpj ^p^_ BBpnn CDCDpn^. j?"y DQipnn DDipn^ rj; ^ipj b)B^ ^Vipnn ^^ipn^ 1 *^ 1 ^p^pnn "^pkp-^'. 1 Rarely b^\ Also h\QPi. Also Snpnn. Also Vnpn^. 87] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 145 5. THE VARIOUS INFINITIVES CONSTRUCT ^1. Nifai. PI'el. Hif'il. H6f'&l. Strong 'B laryng. [k'tul] '^ laryng. njOj? bbi P re -.'B pQ-t "^ ^^E:p .T^ nicj? jrj; Bp ry "P I'j; ^T KardySo, ?. [hikUtal] 'y laryng. ^^p ^XpH [m&] [haktal] n^p n^ppn [huktai] - t:it HDDn ^C3J b^^n T - ^ipin niDpn ntep ntopn ntopn copn Dipip Dpn Vipn b^lp b^pn XIII. Nouns 88, The Inflection of Nouns 1. ^t2i< Saying, horn '-)J2i^; ^21 Word, tvom^^^; HIO Death, from niD- 2. n'n (1:24); n^E^XI. (1:1); D^-Q^S''. (1:22); nlK-DhK (1:14); D^r^f (3:6). 3- J/"'p"1-V"'p1 (1:14); nJ1-ni1 (1:26); D"'JS-"'JS (1:2); ynN-lnin (1:24); pia-">3^p (14:18). 4. nMl^. (^=22); piJ-DD^r^ (3:5); E^l-':jEflK (3:16); nJini<(20:l); mOa (13:14). T :j- r J t The inflection of nouns includes, 1. The fonnation of the noun-stems from the root, or from other nouns; 2. The addition of affixes for gender and number; 3. The changes of stem and termination in the formation of the construct state; 4. The addition of pronominal suffixes and affixes. 89, Nouns with One, Originally Short, Formative Votvel 1. a. ibWM katl]; y*]J< Earth; :3*li; Evening; pX Stone; VIK^ Swarm, &. ibWJorWh "nty^^Sferb; "^^pBook; ^)yHelp; 11)} Eden. C' i/^P f^^ k^t^; IpiS Morning; TIE^'H Darkness; ^p{< Saying. 2. a. VI) Seed; naj Perpetuity; nii< Path; ^m Youth; nnH Under. 6. P]K (=^3^5) W- ^SK = ^SJX) Nose; tj; ( = Uj;) (?oa<. c. ^"^B Frm*^* inn Desolation; !|n3 Waste; HD? Weeping. 146 89] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 147 3. 2/2^ Hmtey; ^^J^Q A little; ^^"2 Stench; ^{^13 Well. 4. a. nS^O Queen; n"nW Maiden; HI^E^ Rest. ft. mnO C'otJer^; nnOK^ GMn^s; rnOK Sai/iny; nHio t:' t: t:- t: Gift. o- n^DK Food; nODn WiKfom. T : T T ; T 1. These nouns, called Se^olates, had, originally, one short vowel (a, i or u), which, generally, stood with the first radical. A helping- vowel was then inserted under the second radical, and the formative vowel was then changed: a to e; i to e; ii to 5. 2. When the root contains one or more weak radicals, certain changes occur: a. In 'y or '7 laryngeal steins, a is the helping-vowel, instead of e; and, in '^ laryngeal a-class stems, the original formative a stands unchanged.^ b. In Y^ stems, J is assimilated, represented in the following consonant by D&ge-f6rte, and then rejected from this consonant whenever it is not followed by a vowel. c. In n" / stems occur formations ending in ^ , ) and H . Note. For so-caJled ^y, Y^J and V'j; Segolates, see 100. and 109. 3. In a small number of nouns, the formative vowel stands under the second radical, instead of under the first; in these, a suffers no change; but i and ii, under the tone, become e and 6; no helping-vowel is needed. 4. Many feminine nouns are formed from Sejolate stems; the feminine ending being added to the primary form O^D /CDp> 7Qp)5 ^^* an original ii is generally deflected to 6. Note 1. The ?al Infinitive Const, (kutiil = k'tul and feutl) is with some suflSxes treated like a Segolate noun; while the Inf. Const, of verbs ^B and V'B (H^D = Ph^) is a Segolate formation. Cf., however, on"? bread, onn toomb. 148 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 90 Note 2. Segolates in the plural form look like two-vowel nouns. Whether this is a survival of an original two-vowel form in these nouns or is a later development of a one-vowel form by analogy b not clear, 90. Nouns with Two, Originally Short, Formative Vowels 1. o. 6EDp/orkatal]; Ul^ Man; DDH Wise; ^21 Word; ^^"^ tJt tttt tt Upnght; ^{if3 Fksh; ^QJl Camel; )y^ Com; DOn TT TT JT* '' ^ Violence, m^ (=saday) Field; nD*^ BeaiUifid; n^lH Pregnant T T V T V T h. 6C?J? for katn]; |pj Old man; 133 Hea^; |0{< Trtity; ipj; jy^e^; n*)^ Weary; )\^^^ Fat; ^011 Deficient, c. [y^D /o^ t^atiil]; y^j; Round; p\2^ Deep; IhJ -Spoe(f; '^i; iV^aA:g the vowel of the first radical becoming *wa. 92. Nouns with One Long and One Short Formative Vowel 1. 6ip1p /or Utal]; nb)}J Eternity; ^a^^ Treasury; np^} (for 'osay) Making; HE^DI (/tep = ytt61]; ^\21^ Hero; ^"O^ Drunkard; llBa Sjpar^ row. 5. [^^EDp]; n^li? Great; y^JjaJJ Sfron^; p^J^^ Righteous; "^Q^ Fettered. 6. 6lCDp]; TID^; Pillar; b)2^ Childless; V\in Merciful. 7. [^^JSp]; T)J3/ Learner; D^DHJ Consolation. Remark. yj|p? Abomination; ^)^^ Idol; n^y Pi'War; ^!|aB Unclean Thing. A fifth class includes nouns whose second radical is reduplicated. This doubling intensifies the root-idea, giving it greater force or greater firmness: 1. Formations like 1|: a 1 1 & 1 are frequent, but with no special significance. Remark. ^It is a question whether nouns of this form indicative of occupation have S or a (see 4. a below) ; the corresponding Arabic have a, yet some of these have a in the Construct state. 2. Formations like (^attel are rare, except as Pi'el Infinitives Construct. 152 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 95 3. Formations like k 1 1 1 e 1 are, mostly, adjectives designating de- formities and faults, physical or moral. 4. a. Formations like t a 1 1 a 1 are, properly, nouns indicative of occupation; but see 1. R. above. h. The form k 1 1 1 a 1 is the same as i: a 1 1 d 1 with the penulti- mate a attenuated to i. c. The form k 1 1 1 6 1 is the same as ^ 1 1 1 a 1 with d rounded to 6. 5. Formations like J: a 1 1 1 1 are adjectives expressing a personal quality. 6. Formations like k a 1 1 u 1 are descriptive epithets of persons or things. 7. Formations like k i 1 1 u 1 are, for the most part, abstracts, and are often used in the plural. Remark. ^This is a fovorite formation for terms designating or characterizing idolatrous objects and ideas. 94. Nouns with the Third Radical Reduplicated 1. \:^^^ Tranquil; m^ Grem; HIX:! (=^1J) Comety; ^^QJ^ Faint; ^TV^^ Splendor; y^^T] Dark; '?7nJ Pasture; : - : - -II- D^DID^^J Adulteries. _. ,_ 2. !?h^nD Full of twists; TJSpSjn Full of turns; D^P1{< Od- dish; "in^^Jlp Blackish; r\)OQO^ Rabble ; ^r)^0^ Crooked. A sixth class, closely related to the fifth class, includes: 1. Noun-formations with the third radical reduplicated, the signifi- cation being, in general, the same as when the second radical is doubled. 2. A few words in which the second and third radicals are redupli- cated, the signification being that of intensity, or repetition; in the case of adjectives of color, there is a diminutive force. 95. Nouns with ^ and "1 Prefixed 1- i}2^^ Finger; H^^i^ Fist; JH^'X LaMing; ^TDi< Violent. 2. ina*' Oil; E:1p^' Pouch; cf. the proper names Ori^l^^ nOS^ 96] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 153 A seventh class includes nouns formed by prefixing ^, or ^ : 1. A few nouns are formed by means of a prosthetic ^; this K is merely euphonic and has no significance. 2, Nouns with a prefixed "^ occur rarely as appellatives; but fre- quently as proper names, where however they are really verbal forms. 96, Nouns with Q Preyed 1- [b^pDfoT^QpDhbDi^'OFood; riD^DQ Kingdom ;r\bDii,Q Knife; ?na (=?n:D) Gift; 5fl0 (=t^^^^^m(7; "l^'ODD i^aimV 8. iblDDpPl; C^Q^P (7an7im^- ^!|;;jp 5oft; DHKO Granary. An eighth class includes nouns formed by prefixing Q, the same element which is used in the formation of participles. So far as concerns the vowels employed the following combinations may be noted: 1. a h, the latter of which is rounded from a. Feminines in H and H-^r- occur. In yQ stems, 3 is assimilated; in V'g) stems, aw 154 ELEMENTS OF HEBBEW [{ 97 becomes 6; in H*'!? forms, the second a becomes ^ (probably a con- traction of ay). 2. i k, the former of which is attenuated, the latter rounded from an original a; the usual vowel changes take place in weak stems. 3. a e, the latter of which is lowered from i; the usual vowel changes take place in weak stems. 4. i e, the i of which is the attenuation of a (c/. 3.). 5. a 5, the 6 of which is lowered from an original ii. 6. a 6, i 6, of which 6 is rounded from &, while ! is attenuated from a. 7. a t, used only in the formation of Hif'tl participles (m.). 8. a ti, not used to any great extent. For 0-formations from bi-literal roots, see 100. 97. The Signification of Nouns with Q Prefixed 1. n^HE^D Destroyer; ^^32^D A didactic poem (= instructor); Y^iyD ^^ ^^ inspires terror; ^BO What faUs off, chaff; nQ3Q Covering. 2. bD^D Food; n^pbD Booty; |np Gift; ^)^]J2 Psdm; '^y^^Q That which is small; DH^ID ^^^ which is remote. 3. n^pXp Knife; HnDD Key; nO^Q Goad. 4. QE^P Dwelling-place; 13"ip Desert; HBID Altar. S* nDilD Smiting; tXl^D Sickness; *^2f^D Straightness ; nDH/D T"- v:- T" tt:- War. The letter D is from ^D (who) or HD (what), and b used in the T formation of nouns: 1. To denote the subject of an action; cf. its use denoting agency in Pi'el, Hif'tl and Hi^a'el participles. 2. To denote the object of an action, or the subject of a quality; cf. its use in Pii'al and Hof'al participles. 3. The instrument by which an action is performed. 4. The place (or time) in which an action is performed. 5. The action or quality which is contained in the root. 99] BY AN mDUCTIVE METHOD 165 98, Nouns Formed by Prefixing J^ 1. 6Bpn for "pepni; Donn (?); 3E^in Tenant; nnDln Reproof; |0*pl 5ow^>cip/.; "^npn ^^oaA:,- n^^pn comp/e^e- 5. [^^IQpn]; D'^K^nn Diseases; D^JPl Consolation; n^^^H Drought; HlDVi^.J? -^^^^^ Remark. 110*1*10 ^^^P */e^2); nWE^'n Deliverance; 11*1X30 Glory, A ninth class of nouns includes those with the prefix Jl. This pre- fix is the same as that used in the Impf. 3 fem. It is used in a neuter sense, and is employed in the formation of abstract nouns, but rarely of concrete nouns. The cases cited above exhibit the various forms assumed by nouns of this class, as well as the vowel changes which take place in formations from weak stems. Remark. Nouns with p prefixed have also, in the majority of instances, the feminine ending H 99, Nouns Formed by means of Affixes 1- !?D*13 Garden; ^n3 Iron; ^t;2;i Cup of a flower; ^b*1p Ankle; QtOin 0) Sacred scribe. f 2. a. ))'^r\^Last; ))^i^'^ First ; |l*iD{< Poor; )]^^^ Most high. h. r^^p Gain; |n^E^* Table; n'lp Offering; pDi* Destruction, 156 ELEMENTS OF HEBBEW [ 100 c, )\^t\B Interpretation; |^*)^3 Success; )*r^)y Blindness; ?1n!S2 Confidence; ))'^2] Memorial; |*i2!^J? Pain; ))H^ Majesty. A tenth class of nouns includes those with affixes, 7, Q and J: 1. Nouns formed by the addition of 7 and Q are few, and have no special significance; they should perhaps be regarded as quadri- literals and may reflect some foreign influence. 2. Nouns formed by the addition of J are numerous, including a. Adjectives formed either from a noun-stem or from a root. b. Abstract substantives ending in hn. c. Abstract substantives ending in on, rounded from &n. 100. Nouns from Bi-Literal Roots 1. a. 21 Great; TT) Tender; ^^ Weak; "^Ip Bitter; Qpi Complete; 1*1/2 Bride; n^D Unleavened bread; ^B2 Hf^nds, D^ Mother; ^p Mound; 2^ Heart; |f Tooth; ^^ Shadow; n'lD Measurement; H^D Word; 11^2 Swamp; n-12 Spoil; T T T T ^B{J His mother. n Completeness; 73 All; pH Statute; 3"^ -B^ar; 2"^ Mul- titude; nSn Integrity; nSH Statute; D^2 AU of them. &. Dp; D*); |2; ?al act. ptcp. of )"y and V'j; verbs. yb CAaJf; nin ^i^ni; ^lE^' Ox; p)^ Leg. *^j| Stranger; *)J Lamp; J^Q Dead; y'^ Noise. on; Dip; niil; TOD; M. Const, of ^i; verbs. ni'^S Understanding; ^^^ Judgment; 2"'*! Strife; ^^^, H/^Jl Joy; pp SoH; H^p ^^V. 2. !?3^^ Wheel; nnHD Frightful; 1212 Rvby; Ipl^ Crown of head; Th'h\ Skull; p12p2 Flask; bpbv Worthless; U"^yr\yp\ Scorn. 100] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 157 3. a. "nOD Cover; ^DD Circle; ^yo Evil; ^yp Distress; HSIJ^O Desolation; \yQ Shield; H/iD Itoll; HilllD Covering; nSlD Purpose; n?DD Highway; nnriQ T^^rror; 2DD Divan; n2DD Covering; n3^D Hedge. & IlKD Luminary; Dl^lQ ZTetVA^; DipD P/oc^; ^I^D ferror; T It i^l29 Entrance; nlJ!p i^^^; DlJO P%^^* rTllJP J^a^P- 5ton(i; nnlJO T^^rror; H^lHO 2>anciny; p!|aQ Pillar; Hi^l'np Running; nDIE^D Apostasy; nniJD ^2e^- nDDo^^^i^*^^; D\':)Oi^a*^*^^; n^no^^Kf^; nno Promnce. c- 2D1D Surrounding (?); 'HDID Coverer (?); 1D1D Removed, d' D*nD Soundness; TT^O Weakness. 4. a. n^nn Praw^; n^nH Beginning; fliinn Pawr; H^DR T*: T: T*: t*: Prayer. ^' nyQV\ Understanding; n01"*)n Offering; nJlOO Likeness; T : T : T : nniDR Z>ea\i;^bp Third {cf. ^^0; ''E^^'pn Fiflh; etc. &. '^'2i<)D Moabite ; "^^^i^ Aramcean ; 'f^^'^^Gershonite; 'J*^^!/ Hebrew. "^JlDy Northerner; ^*^3J Foreigner; ''IIS Villager. 5. n^E^t^^l Beginning; HID/D Kingdom; fllJO^X Widowhood. Nouns formed from other nouns, and not directly from the root, are termed denominatives. The most common formations are: 1. Nouns with the form of the |fal active participle, indicating agency. 2. Nouns with the prefix D, indicating the place where a thing is found. 3. Adjectives and nouns formed by the affix J^ or J (seldom V\). 4. Adjectives formed by the affix ^ ; these are, a. Ordinals formed from cardinals; b. Gentilics and patronymics; and a few others. 5. Nouns formed by the affixes J^^ and ni> designating abstract ideas. 104. The Formation of Noun-Stems From 88-103. it has been seen that noun-stems are formed, 1. Directly from the root: o. By means of vowels given to the root; as in the case of (1) nouns with one, originally short, vowel ( 89, 100.); 105] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 161 (2) nouns with one Originally long vowel ( 100.); (3) nouns with two (originally) short vowels ( 90.); (4) nouns with one (originally) short and one long vowel (91.); (5) nouns with one long and one (originally) short vowel ( 92.); h. By a reduplication of one or more of the consonants of the root; as in the case of (1) nouns with the second radical doubled ( 93.); (2) nouns with the third, or the second and third radicals doubled (94.); (3) nouns with the entire root doubled ( 100.); c. By prefixing vowels and consonants to the root; as in the case of (1) nouns with X, H or *) prefixed (95, 100.); (2) nouns with Q prefixed (96, 97, 100.); (3) nouns with H prefixed (98, 100.); d. By affixing vowels and consonants to the root; as in the case of (1) nouns with 7, D or J aflSxed, with a vowel (99, 100.); (2) nouns with four or five radicals ( 101.); (3) nouns compounded of two distinct words ( 102.). 2. From other nouns (and called denominatives), by the various means indicated above ( 103.). 105. The Formation of Cases 1. inO in hi<\^)nD (4:18); ?|D2; in bi<)D\lJ'; UB in ^WJS (32:32). Remark.-YnX-1n"!n (1:24); -|j?D lJ2^ "IBS ^^2'; IJ^^O 2. a. njsa (13:14); Hs'' (13:14); 2 jjin naix (20:1); rhmH T J T T.T VjV - T :j- T v: I T (18:6). ^. D'D)^'; D"jn (29:15); Q-^Cf^Ef (31:2) /or SilSam. 1 Sam. 1:20 Num. 24:3, 15. Num. 23:18. Ps. 114:8. Ex. 13:21. 162 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 106 Very slight evidence of case-endings is found in Hebrew: 1. The only possible case of a nominative ending is the {1 in the first part of a few proper names; as in the examples cited above, )r\D = ^^^ o/; )12^ = name of; )}Q = face of. This is open to serious doubt since the words to which ti is attached do not function as nominatives in these cases. Remark. An old ending )=d, appears in a few forms, but its origin and significance are unknown. 2. The accusative had the ending a and appears only a. In the so-called He directive (H ), which (1) is used to denote direction or motion; but (2) is often used in a weaker sense to designate the place where, and (3) in many cases seems to be entirely without force. h. In the syllables am and 6m (the latter by the rounding of d), which are found in certain adverbs. 3. No genitive ending appears in our texts. 106, Affixes for Gender and Number 1. n1 (1:3); 31Q (1:4); Q^i (1:5); -l(-?3 (1:5); j;ipn (1:6). 2. a. trnOK (4:23); 1nE^ (2:24); Ipima (4:5). T : : T : n'n (n^n) (1:25); in^n (1:24); in2Ji (31:39); nj"i (nrO (1:26); nOt^J (HDE?:) (2:7).' " T T - : T T : h. n"'E'n (1:1); niDl (1:26); HDnnO (1:2); nE'D"! . (1:21)'.' nDSnnp (3:24); n^f'TpD (1:16); mh (4:2); TST}. (2:9); 'nnp (4:11). c. HE'a"' (1:9); r\'Qr\2 (1:24); .TH (1:24); nDHX (2:5); TT- T": T- TT-: HE'K (3:4). T 3. nn (1:14); nijn (3:7); nn^ln (2:4). 4. a. D^i'?X (1:1); WTST' (1:22); D''D'' (1:14); DnylO (1:14); v: - T -: t D"':E^(1:14). 107] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 163 h. ^:^ (1:2); ^y^S (3:5); ^^^ (4:23); ^^2 (6:4); ^^^^ (6:4). 5. D"^^^, whence "i^^ (1:16); D^T}3, (3:6), but ''Jlj; (3:7). The Hebrew has two genders, masculine and feminine; and three numbers, singular, dual and plural. 1. The masculine singular has no particular indication. 2. The sign of the feminine singular is H-^- This feminine sign has a threefold treatment: a. It is retained, with such change of its vowel as may be neces- sary, whenever the noun of which it is a part is in close connection with what follows; as when it (the feminine-sign, p) stands (1) before a pronominal suffix ( 108 ); (2) at the end of a noun in the Construct state ( 107.). b. It appears as ]n (with laryngeals J^ )> ^^ the formation and inflection of many nouns, participles and infinitives. c. n gives way to n> which then ceases to be pronounced, but is retained orthographically as a mere symbol of final i, rounded from a. This form is the more usual indication of the feminine gender. 3. The feminine plural is indicated by the ending p^ {6d for ad), which is unchangeable. 4. The masculine plural is indicated by the endings, o. D^_^ (infi) in the Absolute state ( 107.). b. ^^ (^) in the Construct state ( 107.). Note. Many masculine nouns have plurals in 6^, and many feminine nouns have plurals in im. 5. The dual, used chiefly of objects which go in pairs, is indicated by the endings, a. Q^ (ayim) in the Absolute state. b. ^___ (e) in the Construct state. 107. The Absolute and Construct States 1. n^rib^ (1:1); D^.pe^n (1:1); \^m (1:1); nlXn (1:3); j;^pn(l:6). 2. Dinn ^^B {1:2) faces^f abyss; D^i^^f Hn (1:2) (the) spirit- of God; D^OtS^n y^D*n3 (1:14) in'{the)-expanse-of the heavens. 164 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 107 Of two nouns closely related, the second, in Latin or Greek, is in the genitive, e. g., dominus domirwrum. The same relation is indicated in Hebrew by pronouncing the second noun in close connection with the first. The effort thus to unite the two words in pronunciation as one phrase results invariably in a shortening of the first word, because the tone hastens on to the second, but involves also a re- tention of some old endings which hold their place in the phrase. 1. A noun which is not thus dependent upon a following substan- tive or pronoun is said to be in the Absolute state. 2. A noun which is thus dependent on a following substantive or pronoun is said to be in the Construct state. Note. It is the first of two nouns, therefore, and not the second, which suffers change. 3. n:;h (4:2), c/. n;;h; nipp (i:io), c/. nij:pp; n^j; (3:7), c/. rhv/, ^n (42:15), cf, ^n; m/ of. ny ' 4. n^n (1:25) instead of H^ri; Hill (1:26) instead of flil. T - - : T T 5. in^n (1:24); ^HDJi (31:39); iJ3'; l^i/D^ ^J3 (49:11); 6. 1JD (1:2), c/. D^^iS; ^Q^ (3:17), cf. D^D^^; ^OT (4:11), cf. D^m-, ^^p (1:16), cf.'n^:^p; ^rj; (3:7), cf. D^rj;. Remark. ^65., ^"^Q (1:11), Con^^., i^ 5 (1:29); Ahs.,i^'2)i,'^ Const., NDa'; Abs., H^^ (32:12), Con^t, J^-)^ (22:12); Ms., TI^Q T : |v .... (14:17), Co7W<.,T]7p (14:1); Abs., "^^Q,^ Const., "^^Q (5:1); Abs.,'^^:^ (37:2), Con^t.,'^^^^ So far as concerns endings or affixes, the Construct state differs from the Absolute in the following particulars: 3. Final n__ (i. e., e = ay) gives place to n_. (i. e., e = ay). Note. Compare with this the fact that in H' / verbs, the Imperfect ends in H (^) but the Imperative in H (e). Josh. 15 : 8. Num. 21 : 20. Num. 23 : 18. Ps. 114 : 8. Deut. 33:16. Zech. 11:17. ^ Num. 1 : 3. Deut. 4 : 19. 2 Kgs. 5:5. w x s^m, 2 : 13. lOS] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 165 4. The original form of the feminine affix H > preserved by its close connection with what follows, appears instead of the later H 5. The endings 6 {)) and i (^__) appear occasionally in Construct forms, serving as connecting vowels binding the Construct to its genitive. 6. The affix ^__ (=ay) appears instead of the ordinary plural and dual endings Q^ and Q^ . ' j~ Remark 1. ^The feminine plural affix 6^ is the same in Absolute and Construct. Remark 2. Final vowels, other than those just mentioned, as well as final k when followed by {^, and Segolates in the singular (strong and laryngeal) do not suffer change in the Construct state. Remark 3. ^The Construct form may best be explained by understanding that it is really a constituent element of a phrase which tends somewhat toward becoming a compound word. The Construct itself, therefore has no primary tone, the tone having passed on to the next word. 108, The Pronominal Suffixes [See Paradigms A. and OJ TABULAR VIEW Masc. sg. Masc. plur. Pern. sg. Fern. plur. Absolute DID D^pID HDID niDiD Construct DID ipID npiD niDiD Sing. 1 c. ipiD npiD ^noiD T 1 ^ntoiD 2 m. 2f. 3 m. ?]p1p "^PID 1D1D ?]^p1D T):piD VD1D T TjnpiD Tjnpip inoiD T 1 ?)^ntoip :]^ntoip vnlDiD 3f. riDID T n^DiD T JV nnDiD T T 1 nTitoiD T JV 1 Plur. 1 c. IJpID ilJipID i:nDiD irntoiD 2 m. DDD1D V : DD^DID DDHDID DD^ntoiD 2f. 3 m. DD1D IP^pIp Dn^DID 1 ipnpip DnoiD T T 1 DH^nlDID 3f. 'DID lO^pip jnpip jn^ntoiD 166 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 108 1. a. iro^ (1:11) /or iin-rD"?; It (3:22) for^r\-T; i:>^a (4:4). nrn^ (1:24) /or riTD^; nE^"l>< (3:6) /or ,-!-''; r^^] (3:15). D-^1p'; Q-anX'; D-S-j-n'; Q-Dl^^; p^lp'; pa^-' TjVp (3:10); ^^m (3:14); ?]J|-]] (3:15); DD^D^ (3:5). 6- in-nE' (23:9); "n-Jin (3:16); n-E'" (3:16); U'D^S -"^ ; I - : - (1:26). rai* (2:24); T|">nX (4:9); VHX (4:8); HIB (4:11). 2. nnpx bvi ""n-iDx (4:23); nnsn *< ""nnan (4:23); {npit2^n(4:7)'' The relation existing between a noun and its pronominal suffix is really the Construct relation. The form of the noun, however, is not always identical with that of the Construct, but varies with the position of the tone. In this section only the endings of the noun, as affected by the suffix, are treated. 1. Masculine nouns in the singular take, a. A connecting vowel a (1) in the form of l, before ^H, H, Q and J, the suffixes of the 3d person; (2) in the form of -r, before Tj, Qp, |p. b. A connecting vowel i (1) in the form of e before ^H (i^ H'/ stems and a few poetical forms), T]> M- (2) in the form of i before all suffixes in the words 2^^ father, T nX brother, HSD T^rwuth. T Remark 1. Certain changes take place, viz., ^H to \ H to n f the final vowel of the latter form having been dropped. Remark 2. Before T], QD, ]D a is deflected to e in pause. Niun 14 : 1. Deut. 4 : 38. 1 Kgs. 2:4. Jer. 15 : 9. Ruth 1:9. "Ex. 35:26. 108] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 167 2. Feminine nouns in the singular preserve before suffixes the earlier form of the feminine affix, which is Il-^j but the ___ when standing in an open syllable is rounded. Note. The feminine affix is followed by the same connecting vowels as those which occur with masculine nouns (see above, 1. a, b). 3. a. "iDa;? (2:23); lDn"T; "TJ-M'; rPiQ'; r['>Q12.* b. D.TJB^ (2:25); DDTi? (3:5); )n2^n' (4:4); DHrO^' (1:21). c. TJtin (3:14); ?]tBi?(3:19); TJIJB (4:6); H^JS-' d. VBX (2:7); VDIT; VIB (4:5); T'SJ3. r ~ tt: tt tt: 4. vriyb'n (2:21); vHi'i (6:9); ^nh'x'; iJ^niDi^'"; ^ni:3 (31:26); irn1J3 (34:9); rpn'^T'; "^j^niS (19:12). Remark.-Qnl2^' and Dn^nlDt^l^^; c/. also UViW (25:16); 3. The masculine plural has before all suffixes the ending ay, which, in the Construct, appears in the form of e. But certain modifications in the form of this ending take place, due to the character of the following consonants: a. The form ay (^__) appears unchanged (1) in the 1 c. sg. ^ , the *> of the suffix having been absorbed by the final ^ of the ending. (2) in the 2 f . sg. T]^_^_, Tl being joined by the helping-vowel __. b. The form ay (^ ) is contracted to e (^_J before all plural suffixes. c. The form ay 0_J) is contracted to ^^^ (e) before 71 and H. d. The original form ay {'^_^) loses ^ and rounds a to & before (in changed according to 44. 4. c. to) ), the ^ being generally re- tained orthographically. Isa. 68 : 2. * Jer. 2 : 33. 1 Sam. 25 : 35. Jer. 2 : 34. With -vr- written defectively, instead of '>-^. 1 Sam. 1 : 18. Deut. 10 : 12. Deut. 32 : 11. Ex. 7 : 3. w Ps. 74 : 9. " Ezek. 16 : 20. " Ex. 4:5. "1 Chron. 4 : 38. " Ps. 74 : 4. 168 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 109 4. The feminine plural with suffixes has (1) J^^, the usual affix of the fem. plur., (2) the masculine plural ending ^ , which is modi- fied in the manner just described (see above, 3. a-d) ; and then (3) the same suffixes as were used with the masc. plur. Remark. Very frequently the suffix is attached directly to l^); this is done probably in order to obtain a shorter form. 109. Stem- Changes in the Inflection of Nouns 1. obe^' but nD^E''; iii^D' but n'-ij Gen. 1 : 16. i Lev. 11 : 42. " Gen. 3 : 14. " Gen. 2 : 21. " Gen. 2 : 23. " Num. 18 : 31. Jon. 1 : 3. " Gen 18 : 14. i Gen. 24 : 33. ' Gen. 19 : 4. Isa. 24 : 23. 1 Kgs. 7:8. " Josh. 21 : 12. Gen. 24 : 30. " Gen. 50 : 7. 2 Kgs. 21 : 5. * Gen. 24 : 52. " Deut. 29 : 9. Nah. 2 : 8. * Gen. 18 : 4. <> Gen. 20 : 18. " Gen. 19 : 4. Gen. 24 : 2. Gen. 2:11. Gen. 2 : 12. * Gen. 1 : 6. Gen. 1 : 20. " Gen, 38 : 28. Gen. 41 : 35. Gen. 37 : 22. *o Gen. 9 : 6. Deut. 28 : 28. *- Deut. 10 : 16. Gen. 2 : 21. ** Gen. 17 : 13. Gen. 20 : 6. " Gen. 40 : 19. Ps. 21 : 7. * Gen. 14 : 18. Gen. 47:22. o Ps. 119 : 162. " Gen. 4 : 14. Gen. 18 : 25. M peut. 16 : 18. 109] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 169 The noun-stem, if it contains two changeable vowels (7. 4), is subject to change, (1) when terminations of gender and number are added; (2) when the noun stands in the Construct relation with a fol- lowing word; (3) when pronominal suffixes are added. The changes which take place are due to the shifting of the tone: 1. With affixes for gender and number {Absolute) ^ viz., H V\\ D^-^ U\-^f and with the light ( 51. 1. 6) suffixes, the tone is shifted one place; in which case, a. An original a or i, which had become & or e^ before the tone is reduced to S*wa; b. An ultimate tone-Zon^ , or e is retained, since it stands now directly before the tone. 2. With affixes for gender and number in the Construct y viz., ^ , Jnl (also the sing. fem. H-^-.)* and with the grave suffixes when at- tached to plural nouns, the tone is shifted tvx) places; in which case, a. The penultimate vowel being now in a closed unaccented syllable remains short, but . is often attenuated to i; b. The ultimate vowel reduces to *wa. 3. In the case of the Construct singular of masculine nouns and with the grave suffixes (DD, |D) when attached to singular nouns, the tone is shifted one place; in which case, a. The penultimate vowel is reduced to S'wa. bi An ultimate tone-long (originally short) & or e gives way to a. Remark 1. While an original a is rounded to ^ before 71 , it remains short before Q3 . Remark 2. ^The principles here given apply also to the forma- tion and inflection of feminine nouns. Remark 3. J^U active participles and nouns of like formation (92.), in whose inflection the final vowel becomes S*wa before all affixes (except T|, Q2, )2) furnish an important exception to the principle stated in 1. 6 above. The difference in treatment is due to the fact that the participial forms have an unchangeable vowel in the penult. The vowel o, except in w-class Se^^lates, is generally unchangeable. 170 ELEMENTS OF HEBBEW [ 109 4. a. ri^D (14:17) dbs.; Tl^D (14:1) Const.; ^Sp' abs.; ISD (5:1); "IJ?r h. ^3^0'; n^ni (3:15); lO^a (1:27); Ijpba (1:26); ^00*; 6; ?i-(nr c. D^D^D (14:9); nlD^O'; Dn^^ (33:1); Dnp3.' d. (TD^D'; IDa:? (2:23); tlV"! (30:26); Timj'"; TTit^^-Ip." e. ^5^0(17:16); DD^iy^ ^^1^"- D?^?'lp" / D''J1p"6< D"'J1p"; D^Jno"; Dnna (43:16). 5. a. T]in^ T]1n (1:2), nplD (41:48); niD". HlD (25:11), "'nlO (27:2), rnlO^"; n^2 (17:12), n"'2 (12:15), ^^''2 (15:2),1n"'3 (12:17). 6. an (24:25), n3"1 (6:5), D^31 (21:34); QK (3:20), iQK (2:24), DnbS"; p'n (47:22), Dj?n (47:22), D^pH", Him- 6. nit (2:5) 6trf nip (14:7), nllE'", nC^"; nJS (not in e). D"':S (32:31),' 1JS (6:13), 6/lJS (1:2), D.T'JS (9:23). 4. Sepolatestems (90.) deserve particular attention: a. The form assumed in the absolute, viz., /CDp from ^^p, 7I0D /'o^ /CDD ^COD /^om 7C0D> remains unchanged in the Con- struct singular of words with strong consonants or laryngeals. b. In the singular before all suffixes the noun takes the primary form ( 90.); a is sometimes attenuated and ii regularly becomes 6. c. Before the plural affixes (absolute) a pretonic k appears, and the primary vowel becomes Swa. 2 Kgs. 5 : 5. 1 Sam. 2 : 13. 2 Sam. 19 : 44. Ex. 32 : 33. Lev. 25 : 37. Deut. 15 : 14. J Cant. 6 : 8. Ps. 73 : 14. Isa. 7 : 16. 10 Deut. 12 : 17. " Deut. 12 : 26. Deut. 12 : 6. Lev. 22 : 15. Ezek. 20 : 40. Dan. 8 : 6. Hab. 3 : 4. " Deut. 33 : 11. 18 Judg. 16 : 29. i Josh. 2 : 13. Isa. 53 : 9. Jer. 16 : 3. " Deut. 4 : 6. S3 Ex. 13 : 10. " Neh. 12 : 29. Ruth 1 : 2. 110] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 171 d. In the plural before light suffixes the pretonic & is retained. e. In the plural Const, and before grave suffixes the k disappears, and the primary vowel is retained, though sometimes in attenuated or deflected form. /. In the dual the form is generally that which is found in the plural (see c), sometimes that used in the sing, before suffixes (see b). 5. a. Nouns from bi-Uteral roots ( 100.) of the Middle- Vowel class have monosyllabic forms with 6, ^ and i everywhere except in some absol. sing, forms in which ) and *> appear as middle consonants. Cf. a similar development of diphthongs to consonants in English bower from older bur; dowel from older dowl; fire, often pronoimced fiyur, from older fyr. b. 'Aym Doubled (y^^) Segolate-stems, before affixes of gen- der and number, and before suffixes, take D^geS-forte in the second radical, the preceding vowel remaining short. 6. L,med He (H^^) nouns ending in n__ lack this before affixes and suffixes beginning with a vowel; the tone-long k of the first radical, a. Is retained when it would be pretonic, but b. Yields to S'wa in the Construct (sing, or plur.), and when it would be ante-pretonic. 110, Classification of Noun-Stems 1. y-iN, iDp, -ip3, ->i?i Dx. nip. ns, =inn- 2. -Qi, Di. lE'a. ipi, 1D3, 33^, mc;, Dii?. T T T T T T J I T " T T " V T ^ 3. Db'W' 2:>. np:!, n3i2^, obiji. Dsz^p. nnpy. 4. bna, TDX. K^DJ, -inx, niKD, d^dt^. T T T T T I ' " 5. 2n3, -I^On, "1133- "IIBi?, DID, ')W. p, D-1- For purposes of inflection, nouns may conveniently be divided into five classes: 1. The first class includes the so-called Segolates, nouns which originally had one changeable vowel (90.); 2. The second class includes nouns which have two changeable 172 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [m vowels; here belong stems which had originally the vowels a a, a ^i, a u, 1 a, etc. ( 91.). 3. The third class includes nouns which have an unchangeable vowel, whether by nature or position, in the penult, and a change- able vowel in the ultima ( 92.). 4. The fourth class includes nouns which have a changeable vowel in the penult, and an unchangeable vowel in the ultima ( 93.). 5. The fifth class may, for convenience, include all nouns of what- ever origin, the vowel, or vowels, of which are unchangeable. 111. Nouns of the First Class 1. STRONG AND LARYNGEAL STEMS. TABULAR VIEW m&lk iking) sifr {book) (holiness) Sg. abs. *9 ^19 const. i?9 -1DD ^1\? 1. 8Uf. ^3^0 "IBp 'Pl\> gr. 8uf . Q??^o : : ??^1f? PI. abs. D^D^P DnDD DT*1)^ const. .. J - ^1.BP 'Pl^ 1. suf. - T : - 1 : '^19 gr. suf. D?^1SP op^e'lj? Du. abs. (feet) (two-fold) (loins) 'd' t T const. ^^n '^^Q n&T (0 youth) (perpetuity) pfl'i (tcorlt) Sg. abs. "1^; njj ^VS const. "IJ?; nw ^J?'? 1. suf. nyj VP '"^m gr. suf. ?1J?J V -: : ^ii'JM 111] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 173 PI. abs. n&'r (a youth) iperpetuitu) D^na: pO"! (work) const. nji^J ^nv^ 'k^ I. suf . ^")V^ - T : ^bys gr. suf. Du. abs. const. (sandals) DD^bj?B (noon) Dnna ^-t; it REMARKS (For general remarks concerning the inflection of Segolates see { 109.] 1. Instead of the original pure vowel -v, there appears everywhere in w-class stems the deflected vowel -?- (6), the latter always represent- ing the former in closed, as distinguished from sharpened, syllables. 2. Instead of simple S'wa as a reduction of the original u in the pi. abs. and the pi. with light suffixes, a compound S'wa (-tt) is generally found. 3. In the laryngeal stems, -=r and -tt before -r- become -^ and -T- (6). NOTES* 1. In reference to the a-class stems, it may be noted that, a. In pause the a generally becomes k ( Vlt),^ though sometimes -AT e remains (DTp)^>' b. In such forms as Hp^ (1:11), J^^JB (16:12), the K is to be treated as a full consonant. c. In many forms, the original a, before suffixes and before the dual ending, is attenuated to i ("TI^T)-* d. In a few a-class stems, especially 'Q laryngeal, before suf- fixes, e (-T-) stands under the first radical instead of the primary a 1 Under "Notes" there are given the more important variations from the para- digm-forms. Gen. 1 : 29. Gen. 2:8. * Ex. 23 : 18. Gen. 2 : 20. 174 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ lU e. In a few plurals, like D^J^DE^** D^i^E^H* pretonic -?- does not appear. /. There are a few forms, especially '7 laryngeal, which make a Construct like J^tpp instead of i;}p (c/. i;**)]).^ 2. In reference to z-class stems it may be noted that, a. In a few cases, -v- (e) stands under the first radical instead of the original -r- (nij;,' "h^^)'^ 3. In reference to w-class stems it may be noted that, a. The 6 is sometimes retained before suffixes (^"^iin)-* h. The writing ^f- (6) is sometimes found as a substitute for -rr t|.t 4. Segolates with the vowel under the second radical, a. In some cases have the usual inflection (HlIlDti^ jrom 33E^*)^ h. In others treat this vowel as unchangeable (^3t^]).^ c. In still others preserve it by an artificial doubling of the final consonant before affixes (D^Bi^D)-^ 2. Vj;, ^"j;, n"^ AND j;"j; stems. tabular view Sg. abs. mo nn ns D^^ Di? P" const. niD nM ns D> Di Q^ po 1. suf. ^r\\a ^OM ^ne ^i?"i ^s ?n gr. suf. : 1 V : 1" V : : v v : - D?i?i? ?pn PI. abs. D^niD . .. . T : - niGK D^pn const. ^niD ^0'! ^!?: nisK ^pn 1. suf. ^nia in^] ij3^ ^nisx ^^^ Du. abs. D^JJ^J^ D^'^'n^ D^'SS D'^iE^' const. Ji^j; '^^in^ *>S3 ''JIE^ 1 Num. 11:7. 2 Ex. 18 : 4. 1 Kgs. 12 : 28. Isa. 52 : 14. Ex. 30 : 36. Gen. 19 : 33. ' Zeph. 3:3. Ps. 109 : 8. 111] BT AN JNDUCTIVE METHOD 176 REMARKS 1. The absolute forms of Middle-Vowel stems are perhaps develop- ments from diphthongal forms which were the basis of both Absolute and Construct forms; maud or mawdf e. g., becoming mo^ and m,we^; bayt or baiO becoming both bdyid and bed; cf. the analogous case of the Middle-Vowel Pi'el forms. 2. In ''*lp, the -r- is a reduction of the original -^, while i = ly, the third radical with a helping vowel; the i of B in ^^"^S is an attenuation of the original -=", while the -n- of QD^'^S is a deflec- V : : V tion of a. 3. In y^ stems, the original vowel, a, i, u, is generally changed in the abs. sg.; but before affixes the second radical is doubled and the original vowel retained, though 6 is rarely found for u. NOTES 1. In reference to Middle-Vowel stems, it may be noted that, a. Full tri-literal forms sometimes occur in the plural (*' /^H)** and before suffixes and He directive (nn^3)-^ b. Stems t^'J?, {e. g., E^i^-|' = i^^l |i^a*=JKa) are a- class Segolates, the a, lengthened to a, becoming 6; these also will be included in the fifth class. 2. In reference to H' / stems, it may be noted that, a. Forms like ^^'Q become, in pause, ^*^B,^ the S being a deflection of the original a. b. Inflected forms like '^I^C^/ 11*1^2:^'/ D'^lb^.^ Hl^'^l^?*' D^'i^Da'^ for D^'^na, occur; cf. also forms like nD2/' inh"'; these are some of the irregular forms assumed by H' / stems. 3. In reference to ^"^ stems, it may be noted that, a. While 15^^ stands even in Abs., Q^^* stands even in Const. b. Forms like ^H have Const, like ^T\^^ c. -^ is often attenuated to -^ {7ir\B^^ M "HnS)- 1 1 Kgs. 15 : 20. Ex. 28 : 26. Gen. 3:15. * Gen. 4 : 2. Eccl. 2:5. 'Ps. 30:7. ^Jer. 22:21. s Num. 11: 31. Judg. 14 : 5. Ml Chron. 12 : 8 " Ezra 10 : 1. " Gen. 1 : 2. " Jer. 50 : 6. " Gen. 14 : 3. Gen. 42 : 15. Ruth 2 : 14. 176 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [ 112 d. Many fully tri-literal forms are in use. e. Yy forms like r]J{ (='anp) are inflected like yjj forms T - 112. Nouns of the Second Class TABULAR VIEW d&-v&r |^S,-x&m z&-l^In ^&-$Ir s^-d^y *&-mtlV (word) {wise) {old) (.court) (Jield) {deep) sft.abs. -13-n opn |j?j nan nit pD^ const. -)5"n DDn ipT nan ni?' pb;; i.8uf. n^n "DDn ""jpT narj nir gr.suf. Dpnpn Dpp?n Dp:pj npnan DpiE^ PI. abs. onnn D''aDn D"'jpi onan innE'] D"'poy const, nnn ^pDn ^jpi nan ^ip ^pD^r i.8u. nan ^oDn ""jpi naq n.E^ gr. suf. DDnan DD^DDn dd^jdi DDnan * .... > .. . - ;, ..|. . ... .. . - {wings) {loins) (thighs) Du.abs. D^p^s D^^^bn D^T const. ^B^3 REMARKS 1. This class includes all nouns with two, orig. short, vowels. 2. While the original penultimate a, in Const, pi. and before grave suffixes, is generally attenuated to i, it is retained unchanged under laryngeals. 3. In i:a-til forms, there appears in the Const, sg., a instead of i, because the latter cannot stand in a closed accented syllable;^ in the sg. with grave suffixes, this i is deflected to e. 4. The n ^^^ n 111 the Abs. and Const, of H'' / stems is for ay; this ay is entirely lacking before affixes of gender and number, and before suflBxes. Gen. 2:7. * This principle is Icnown as Pliilippi's law, after the scholar who first formulated It. U3J BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 177 5. Many words artificially double the last consonant before all aflfixes; the preceding vowel is then necessarily sharpened. Here may be included, a. Adjectives in 6, ^jy, Hpi Um> etc. h. Nouns in &, PDJl, the adjective form |COp> etc. NOTES 1. The X-r;- of H/ stems stands unchanged even in the Construct. 2. Some words of this class assume in the Construct state a Segolate form, e.g., nHlp^ from nn3, ^*1^^ from TTV; some of these words have also the regular form in the Const., e. g., n23, both n53andnn3.^ 3. In some verbal adjectives the e, lowered from i, is retained even in the Construct state, e. g., VSn/ nD2^>* W"^'"^ 113, Nouns of the Third Class TABULAR VIEW 6-l&m {jetemity) mH-pat '6-yIv 'fl-Um {judgment) {.enemy) {blind) '6-fin Sg. abs. D^lj; DSE^p n:K ubvi mil V ]m const. Dbii? JOiE^P 2:K HTh |P1N 1. suf . ^pblj; ^pBE^P iT im ISlK gr.suf. D?0^13? DDtn V : I PI. abs. D^pJ>iV T : : 1 : Dnn D"'^DlK const. ip^ij; M'n 1. suf. '^Yy. ^iDBpD ^n^N \Tn gr.suf. uyr:h^v Ds^tDScy'D dd^d^k i DD^in (/on(7s) (6otance5) Du.abs. D^inp^O D^'JTi^O const. -JJl^D Num. 34:11. = Gen. 24 : 9. Ex. 4 : 10. l8a. 1:4. Ps. 35 : 27. Ps. 35 : 26. ^ Dan. 12 : 2. 178 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [113 REMARKS 1. This class includes nouns with an unchangeable vowel in the penult; this may be a naturally long vowel, or a short vowel in a closed syllable. 2. The following formations are included: ^CO^p, 7C0lp, /COlp> 7C9D 7C3p> 72DD /BDj many nouns with the third, or the second and third radicals reduplicated; some nouns with J^, H and ^ prefixed; bCpO. bjpj?p, ^pj^O, "PDpp, ^0^!?. b^D^F). ztDpn* /CDpRj many nouns formed by affixes; some nouns with four radicals. The existence of the form i;6tdl from ^dt&l is questioned by many scholars, who trace such words to a Icautal form. But many proper names and the taZ active participle seem to make this form secure. 3. Original a in the sg. Const., and in the sg. with grave suffixes re- mains unchanged; it is reduced in the pi. Const., and in the pi. with grave suffixes. 4. An original i in the sg. before ?|, Qp, |p is usually unchanged, but sometimes is deflected to e; before all other suffixes and before af- fixes it is reduced, 5. The !ljfal act. participle of verbs H'v ^^s the same ending (n )i as was seen in certain nouns of the second class, like HTE^J V T but its first vowel is unchangeable. 6. Many nouns of this class treat the ultimate changeable vowel in the manner described in 112. R. 5, i. e., artificially double the following consonant, and sharpen the vowel: o. |S1K(92.); p)^ (99.); D^fe^D (96.); and others. ^- PO ])^P ( ^^)' D1!?1^ ( ^4- 2); and others. c. ^na, !?Dn5 ( 99. 1. a); ^^^ ( 100. 1); and others. d^ ^"^J^Vj Dbnn, D'lnp ( lOl. D; and others. 114] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 179 114, Nouns of the Fourth and Fifth Classes TABULAR VIEW g&-(i6i p&-kid gd. (great) (overseer) '&-nly (poor) sOs (horse) DID t&l-mjd {disciple) : ki-av T : const, ^na nipB m DID : - 3n3 T : 1. 8uf. i-jips V^D n^p^n ^3n3 T : &. suf. DDn^ps DDD V : 1 V : r : - D33n3 V : IT : PI. abs.Di>n-lDn^pS ^^^M D^pID Dn^p^n D^3n3 const. 1^113 n;pB ''^.^^. iDiD .... - ^3n3 T : 1. suf. l-]ipB ipiD ^TP^n ^3n3 ~ T : gr. suf. D^n^'DS DD":i; DD^pIp DD^Tp^n i D3^3n3 IT : REMARKS ON NOUNS OF THE FOURTH CLASS 1. The fourth class includes nouns which have a changeable vowel in the penult and an unchangeable vowel in the ultima. Here belong many adjectives like /^COp and ?^CDp ( 91. 1. a, 6); passive participles like 7^J0p ( 91. 1. c); formations in which a -^j orig- inally in a closed syllable, has become -r- in an open syllable; and a few nouns ending in on with a pretonic -r- (99. 2. e), 2. In a few r\"b stems with the form b'^CDp ( 91. 1. b) the radical ^, when final, in the absence of an affix, is absorbed in the formative vowel i; but when affixes of any kind are attached, it ap- pears in the form of DigeS-forte; D^^^J^/ REMARKS ON NOUNS OF THE FIFTH GLASS 1. This class includes those nouns which do not suffer change of any kind in inflection. 2. Here belong monosyllabic nouns like D1D> T*!* 1lE^> with an unchangeable vowel; participles like Qp and HO 5 formations like 180 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [115 ^tpp, b)W' b^^p^ b)^p ( 91- d-f) which have an unchange- able vowel, with a S*wa reduced from an original i or u; formations like b)^pDf b^^pD. b)lDpD ( 96. 6-8); formations like /''ppn* 71CDpn (98' 4, 5); some formations with the aflfix on ( 99. 2); and a few denominatives ( 103.). 115, Feminine Nouns I. FEMININES OF THE FIRST GLASS TABULAR VIEW (queen) (reproach) tiir-bJW (ruin) (statute) g of which those numbered 3-6, 8-11 suffer no change of stem, following the inflection of npH given above. 4. Just as Tl/D ^s derived from Tl^D, so H^^Dil is derived from "^^il by the addition of J^ and the deflection of a to I. Before sufl[ixes the original -=- is attenuated to i. 2. FEMININES OF THE SECOND CLASS TABULAR VIEW (Xighteousness) 1 {.cry) (l/eor) (jcrown) (tiofence) Sg. abs. ^pl^ "RVJ T T ^19^-.. T : const. npiv ^m njE^ n-iojf rih? 1. 8Uf . ^npnv 'Op^,! T J T T ; gr. suf . ?0P1V ?rip^,i V : - : ' PL abs. nipiV niJE' nliD:? const. nip")v (Hpj) ' nncj;? Du. abs. J- T : const. ^^^V REMARKS 1. The same stem-changes take place before the ending n as before the plural endings ( 109.). 2. In the Const, sg. and pi., as well as before suffixes, the original a of the first syl., while retained with laryngeals, is generally atten- uated to 1. 3. The *w& before the endings 0-=- (Const, sg.) and J^l (Const, pi.) is silent, except in laryngeal nouns where it serves as a helping- vowel. 4. Before the fem. ending the final ^-^ of H' / forms is lacking; in this case the a of the first syl. is rounded or reduced according to the position of the accent. 182 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [115 5. Several nouns with the form H^COD in the Abs. have O^CDD in the Const. ; these in the singular as well as those which have the form n /CDp in the Abs., attenuate the original a to i before suffixes. 6. Nouns of the form H^COD frequently retain the -^ in the Construct. NOTES 1. Forms like ka-til become ka-tal when the fem. ending is added. 2. Forms like n'^^f HDL HnD* from bi-literal roots in which t T T T T the stem-vowel is naturally long, retain it in the Const. 3. FEMININES OF THE THIRD AND FOURTH CLASSES TABULAR VIEW y6-n&lft gfll-gmt lj:6-^i-l&e g(16-iae thll-iae mnQ-^^&e (sprout) {skull) {killing f.) (great f.) (praise) (rest) sg.abs. ripjl"" nblbn n^CDlp nbiii n^nn nnijo const. nj^Jl^ rh}b\ n^Dip nVn^ rhm nrnjjp i.8uf. inDJl"! "in^sbrnbcDlp Ti^nn'TiniJo gr, 8uf. DDnpJi-; Dpn^a^a DpHiTin PI. abs. [npm ni^a^3ni^tDipniynanl>>nnnimjD const, nlpjl^ n)b:h:i nlVn;i nl^nn REMARKS 1. Feminines in f^ <^f the third class arise in the same manner as those described in 115, 1. R. 4, the ground-form generally hav- ing a in the ultima, though sometimes ii. 2. As before, the original a (or 6 deflected from ii) appears before suffixes. 3. The feminine participle most frequently assumes the form n^CDD* though H/COD is common; the form HH/^ (Gen. 16:11) is of interest. 4. Feminines of the fourth class present no points of difficulty. 116] BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 183 116, Irregular Nouns 1. 2{< Father; Const. ^i^Jj^; with suf., "^^^ {my father), TP'Z^, in^DX or V3t^, n^3x, DD*D piur., nlD><; Const, n{2. 2. riif, Brother; Const., "intj|; with suf., "ipi^ {my brother), TprHf,, nym-, piur., n'^m-. const., in; with suf., inx, T)in. DD"'nX. etc. 3. "inX (for ini<. with D. f. implied) One; Const., nn4< (used T V T - - - also before |0); fern., HPI^^ (= mnXX in pause, nHX; J - - VaV - AT V piur., D^THi^ Some, the same. 4. nlnX Sister; Const., HlllK; with suf., ''nlriK; P^ur. with suf., Tin"'n; also inln, DD''nlni< from nni<. T : - - -: V I -: t t 5. \^^i^Man; piur., D'^E^iJ* (three times D'^ty'^'J^); Const, "JE^ JK- 6. HDX Maid-servant; with suf ., TlUDi^; piur., nlHD^?; Const., T T ) : IT -; T -: 7. nC^ijt Womxin; Const, HE^X = 'i^t; with suf., "^niZ^N, ^RlZ^i^J piur., D'^E^i; Const., 1tfj; with suf., y^^X DiT^t^J- 8. ^'*>'2 House; Const, H^ 3 J plur., Q'^J^S; Const, ^p3; with suf., " IT 9. n Son; Const, "D,"p, "^^3 (Gen. 49:11), 1J2 (Num. 23:18); with suf., ^^2 t]J3; piur., 0^213; Const, ^J3; with suf., ^J3, ?]^J3, Dn^J3. 10. ri3 (for nJ3, fem. of |3) Daughter; with suf., "JpS (=''0^3 =''n:i3); piur., nlJ3 (qf. D'J3 ^orw); Const, nlJ3. : - T T : 11. nn Father-in-law; with suf., Tj^^pri; HlDH Mother4n4aw; T ) J- T T 12. D^*J Pat/; piur., D*)^*'; Const, '>D' and nlO^ dual, D^'DI^ 13. *J^3 Vessel; piur., D*)^3; Const, 1^3; with suf., "J^S, Dn*'^3. 184 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW [117 14. D'jp (plur.) Water; Const., 'JQ, 'ip'jp; with suf., VD'^D, 15. 'yy City; plur., U"^'!^; Const., ^.j;. 16. nS Mouth; Const, "^e (c/. i^X, ""nX); with suf., "^B, Ti'^Qy in^s or VB, n^s, DD^S; plur., ni^s. J. . T J. . 17. E'^^n (/or E'XI = ?-)) Head; plur., D^E^t*"! (/<" D"'E'"1); Const., 'E?{<^; with suf., 5|je^K*1. 18. D^'OE^' (plur.) Heavens; Const., "JOE^. 117. Numerals GENERAL VIEW With the Masculine. With the Feminine. Absolute. Construct. Absolute. Construct. i T V nnx T\m T\m ;^ D^JEf "'J?' U^T0 ^nE^ 5 T : V J : T E^^E^ ^ nv2-] ny2-j y?*!*^ j;?-] 5 T -: nE^on V J" -: E^Dn T E^on 6 HE^E' T HE^E^ V J" E^E^ EfE^ 7 nj;nE^ ni?3E^ i'5!2' ^'Se' 8 njbE^ T : njbE^ njbE^ : 9 nvE'n ni^E'n VE'n ve^n 10 nnfe^y^ n-i.E'i? -lE^y V iv lE^j; With the Masc. With the Fern. -IE?;; inx nn.E';; nnx 11 lE'V ipE^y nn.E'j^'inE^y 117] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 186 ^00 nt^3TE^'E^' REMARKS 1. The numeral HD^^ one is an adjective, standing after and T V agreeing with its noun. 2. The numeral '^Jt^ (fem. Q^REf, pronounced ta-yim) is a noun, used either in the appositional or Construct relation with the word which it enumerates, and agreeing with it. 3. The numerals from three to ten are abstract feminine substan- tives, used in appositional construction with the noun which they enumerate. The feminine form is used with masculine nouns; the masculine is a shorter form used with feminines. 4. The numerals from eleven to nineteen are formed by uniting ^f^y ten (or the feminine form H'^E^J!/) with the units; here it may be noted: a. In eleven, IHt^ ^^^ HnX have a form like that of the Construct. 5. ''HE^J^, in the second form of eleven, is to be connected with an Assyrian word i^ten (=one). 186 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW [ 117 c. In twelve, Q^iEf is a contraction of D^J5y*> and "'JEf a shortened form of Q^Jt^, the contraction and shortening being due to the close connection of the words; these forms cannot be called Constructs. d. The feminines from thirteen upward have a shortened, but not a real Construct, form. 5. The numerals thirty to ninety are formed by adding the masc. plur. ending Q^ to the units, but twenty (D*'*1E^V) is the plural of ten Op^)- 6. The units are added to the tens by means of 1; in the earlier books preceding the tens, in later books following them. 7. The units take the noun in the plural; the tens, when before it, take the noun in the singular, when after it, in the plural. 8. The numerals eleven to nineteen take the noun in the plural, except in the case of a few very common nouns like day, man, etc. 9. The ordinal first is pE^K^ (c/. ^^'^, head), 10. The ordinals from two to ten are formed from the correspond- ing cardinals by means of the termination ^__, another ^__. being in- serted between the second and third consonants. Note that ''^^^'H lacks the initial J<. 11. Above ten, cardinals are used for ordinals. 12. The feminines of the ordinals are used to express fractional parts. XIV. Separate Particles 118, Adverbs 1. a. ^i^ Where?; ]>< There; ^ Not; QEf There; ^H Not, " T T - h. n] Here; H JH Hither; E^?f Thrice; V2E^ S^^n /i?7ie*. V3^DD> also with fem. T ) .-. : T : rny3D, ^nb'^ntp, Dn^nn^ntp, etc. e. nj; Unto, poet., *)'-|j;;; with suf., "il}}, TT^l)}, Vl^. f. ^y Upon, poet., ^^y; with suf., ^b^. T]^^);, V^j;, H""^;;, ? nnn under.- with suf., "innn, rnnn, DH'innn. onnn; cf. also the form with Nfln Demonstrative ("l^nnH- 1. PrefK)sitions were originally, in most cases, nouns; they were generally Constructs, governing the following noun as if it were a genitive. Note. ^Many words in common use as prepositions still retain their origiaal force as substantives. 120] BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 189 2. Prepositional phrases, composed of two prepositions or of a preposition and a noun, or of a preposition and an adverb, occur frequently. 3. Many prepositions, especially those denoting space and time, \ are in reality plural nouns; some of them, when standing alone, have the form of the plural Construct, ending in ^ ; before pronominal suffixes, most of them assume this form. Note. ^For the inseparable prepositions, see 47. 1-5; 51. 3-5. 120. Conjunctions 1. 1 And; \^ Or; T\^ Also; U^ When, if, or. 2. ^3 Thatj because, for, when. 3. ^5^ That not; |S That not, lest ; ^^^^2 Before that ; 1E^^^- 4. nE^^-^i?, ^3"^j;, nc^'x nnn, ^3 nnn, ni?^x npj;, ^2 3pJ? Because, since; ^^^ W^7 ^^ ^^^^ ^^^^' ^^^^ According as. Conjunctions may be classified as to their origin as follows: 1. Certain words used only as conjunctions, the origin of which is, in most cases, doubtful. 2. Certain words which were originally pronouns. 3. Certain words which were originally substantives, or composed of a substantive and a preposition. 4. Prepositions which, by the addition of HE^X or ^2, become themselves a part of a compound conjunction. Note 1. In general it may be said that any preposition may be followed by ^{^{^ or ^2, and be used as a conjunction. Note 2. In many cases the lE^i^ or ^3 is omitted, and the preposition standing alone used as a conjunction. 121. Interjections 1. r\r\i<, n{< ^h! nj^i2p: l^^i'^P 2/. Ic. Sff. 3 TO. 3/. 2 TO. 2/. ^spn bpn '^cppn ^5p;. ^spri ^^cppn ^??p' ,^'^P^ ^Dpn ^bpn ^^Ppn i^cspi nabspri ^2Dp>? 'ij'?2?pn ^i?p^ nj^Bpn i^Ppi n:yDph Ic. P/. 3 TO. 3/. ! 6pn n:?!spn i^Bpn i^ppn nj^Dpn 2 TO. 2/. ^?p: ^^p^ ^!?p^ Ic. Sff. 2 m. 2/. PZ. 2 TO. 2/. 065. C07lSt. act, pass. wanting bp '^?p i^p nj^bp ^!?pn 6jppn ^CDp l'?pp '^^r'^'P M E pbp bQp;^bp ^isp ^bp;;yDpn 7CDp S3 14 ^Dpp ^22pD ^^P^ ^Dp ^l6p 1 196 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW Paradigm C, Strong Verb 3 pi. f. 3 pi. m. 2 pi. m. 1 pi. C. 3 8g. f. 2^E:p - .-]: =ijn)Dp i:n^Dp jT : - J: irn^Dp i:in^2p nbop nn^CDp T J- T 1 : n^n^Dp n^n^Dp nij^ipp fr^R D^Dp DD^pp =lj)CDp n^CDp Cl!?^pi Di^:p^ m^epn 1j)i?P^. =)jbDp^ jv : 1 : UI^CDp^. uiVapn 1 0)P|T. nVcDp^ nij'Pp"! m^Dpn d"??)^ iJ^Dp f?^p. ^c?R DD^Dpl DD^CDp V : T |: J ^^)?p pibtQp BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 197 with Suffixes 3 sg. m. 2 sg. f. 2 sg. m. 1 sg. c. in^Dp jT T 1 : inn)Dp ';ri)i?R ^;n^^p ^JI^Dp ^1 3 m. 3/. 2 m. 2/. Ic. P/. 3 c. 2 m. Ic. S^. 3 m. MzW/c E S^. 3 m. Epenthet. PL 3 m. 2/. 1 i^Dp ^^^1? ^^iSR ^:Jc?p 1 jv : 1 : 'il^^R' ^:ibopn 1 in^Dj!) ^*?R S^. 2 m. 1 l^Dp ^"^^P 1 ^^=PR ^^iPR '^)9R Construct a i) 198 Paradigm D. Verb PS ('Q) Laryngeal HSfai. Hlf'tt. Nlf'il. g&i. nbavn Dnbbjin bpJ?J n^pj;: n^pj?j ^n^pj;: ]n^p|;j : J- ^:iv b^yi n^p^ n^p:; n^p:; ^n^p;; i^P^ Dn^pij jf^i^P^ i:^pj; iSj. 3 m. 3/. 2 m. 2/. Ic. PZ. 3 c. 2 m. 2/. Ic. Sj. 3 m. 3/. 2 m. 2/. Ic. PI 3 m. 3/. 2 m. 2/. Ic. 5^. 2 m. 2/. P/. 2 m. 2/. . at*. Const. act. pass. 1 T : J- t: it b'^Vn njbp:^n b^)3i ^P^D ^bp:i?n ^Pi?^ ni^pVn ^pj?n ^b:s;n bpj?n yDj?n "^p^n ""^pj^n ^pj; "pbj^x i^pi?;^ i^p]?;: t : ,- v: IV t : 4 "^i i- n:^p^n n^yp^n 1 6 wanting b^i^r\ ^^p^n i^P^n nj^jp^ri i^pj? "i^p;? na^p;;^ '"i^ypa i 1 ^cp^D b^)SJ) ^'Pi(n b^'QV.) 1 ^P^b bW ^^J!P ^'PJ!P T 'v:iv b^v 4-! 1 Paradigm E, Verb *Ayin ('y) Laryngeal 199 HWp&'el. T -:).T : . T : j-| T : . n:^pnn T : .-It : T : j"Jt : . ^>^pn: ^xpnn -:J.T : . nj^Kphn ^iiipnn ^KpnD po-ai. ph^p ^)^P ^ph^p )y7i^D b^pn b^ppi ^b^p^ b^p^ i'?^p'. T : J- ] : i'?{ ^nppnn 'n^ppn ^npp ^nppn 'npp 2/. a inppnn n:ntspnn in^Dpn ninhpn intDp njnep inppn n:in6pn inpp njnbp P/. 2 m. 2/- , nppn npp nbpj nlDp d nppnn n^ppn npp nppn nap Const, ad. nppnp n^ppD nppo npp 1 npp; niDp pass. Paradigm G, 1 ^erb PS NUn (T^) 201 H6f>Sl. HlfU. NIf&l. K&l. bm r\b''^r\ bm r\b^: bm etc. Sg. 3 m. 3/. rh^n n^csn r\b^: 2 m. nb^n rh^r\ ph^: 2/. ^nb^n ^ph^n in^s: regular Ic. 1 ^bm PL 3 c. 2 m. S 2/. Ic. Sgr. 3 m. 3/. 2 m. 2/. b^' bm bm -'bm b^m b^m bm bm bm bm bm ]b^\ n:ibm b^m )b^^: Ic. P/. 3 m. 3/. a ^bm mbm n^bm r\:bm n:^Qn 2 m. 2/. b'm " T ^Qj ^^: Ic. %2m. 2/. ^DJ blD 6 > wanting T : J- T P/. 2 m. 2/. 11 ^^n 1 bi2ir} 1 1 b)m T bm b^iDn T ^bJ rb^ ac<. pa55. b^tsa bm 4.3 1 202 ELEMENTS OP Paradigm H. VerbPe*Mf (5<"D). HEBREW Verb Pe Ydd 0"B) Para- Nif&l. j^M. Hlf'il (prop. '"0). ?j:ai (prop. ^"D). Same as the verb Pe Laryngeal. - T Same as the verb Pe Laryngeal T J' etc. ^n'?D"'n regular Dphyn : J- b^^n b^om -^bmn bm )bm] r\:bmr\ bm^ ^ip^: ^ip^j bm ''bm )bm T : J v: T : J" T : J- : b)m bm, bm : bm T b'lD^D BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD digm L Verb Pe W&w (V'B) 203 H6f&l. Hlfll. NIf&l. VM. T : 1 T : J- : J- Dn^bin V : - 1 T J- : : - Dn^bln V : - 1 : J- bm nb^s^ T : 4- : : - : J- Dnbbi: V : - 1 : J- b^] etc. regular Sg. 3 m. 3/. 2 m. 2/. 1 c. P/. 3 c. 2 m. 2/. Ic. S^r. 3 m. 3/. 2 m. 2/. Ic. PI. 3 m. 3/. 2 m. 2/. Ic. Sfir. 2 m. 2/. P/. 2 m. 2/. a65. C07W<. ac/. pass. 1 n:bbin T : J- njbbln njbbin T : d" b^v " T etc. regular b^^\ b^l ^Qin bm be^n bm ^a^x bm )b^^l 6p;:. n:^b^n n:ibm i^Q^n )bm n:^b^ri r\:hm T : J- T : J- b^ b^: M t a wanting n:]bbin T : J" b^\n nj^bin T : J- T bob:? T : J" 1 a >b4 N4 T ^^DlD b:2)^ ^iS 1 204 ELEMENTS OP HEBREW Paradigm K, Verb HIp&'el. H6r&i. Hlf'il, PO'&l. nJDpnn r\^^r\ riDpn mp nnEspnn T : 1 - : nnppn nnppn nnsp n"'C3pnn n''C3pnn n^epn n^EDpn n^2?p n^Esp ^n^^pnn in''Dpn onv) ^n^2?pn in^sp ^"Q^^^T^ ^^pn iDpn Bp Dn^Bpnn ^^''^p^ (Dnv) Dri''C?pn Dn"'CDp jn^Dpnn ij^Epnn in^epn irsDpn ir^'CDpn lO^ep nispn^. npp^. ^^^\ "liSp^ HBpnn V 1 : T nippn niDpn nepnn nepn nt:pn nispn i^pnn ^ppn ^ppn >spn HBpnx ncDpx V J: - nQp Bpn^. iDp: icDp: 1 ' nrepn'n T JV ): T nrepn nrispn iCDpnn it:pn ic:pn lEDpn nrspnn nrcDpn nrDpn nj\i?pn n^pnj nepj HQpJ ''^Rr' Dpnn,nBpnn nepn "icsprin icspnn wanting ^ppn mpn wanting nj\E)pnn ^TW^ ^^p.^ ni?pn ntepnn niDpn ntep nspnp HDpp V )! T LdmM He (j-j'^b) BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD 205 Pl'el. Nlf&I. ?&i. n^p n^p; n^Dp Sj. 3 m. nncsp nnppj ^m^ 3/. n\Bp T J- T J" J : ^'Wr 2 m. n^Qp n^cpp^ n^Dp 2/. n^Esp ,^n^c?p =)bp "n^EDp: ibp: ^n^CDp i^p Ic. PI. 3 c. 1 Dn^sp Dn^Dpj Dn^pp 2 TO. in^Ep IC^iPpJ lO^pp 2/. Ic. Sj. 3 TO. i^^p' HQp^ n^pi n^pn V JT HQpn 3/. nispn ncppn nepn 2 m. >^pn ipjjn ^Dpn 2/. ni3p isp"! ncDpx nDp Ic. Pi. 3 m. j nr^pn '^lispn nrjppn 'ibpn '"i^'iPpn 'ibpn 3/. 2 TO. nrspn n:\!ppn n^\^pn 2/. nispJ V 1 , n^pj Ic. Sy. 2 m. 23p 'HCpp nippn HDp s? 't?p ^ppn ^PR 2/. :& icsp iCDpn =lDp Pi. 2 m. n^^^P nrcDpn T JV |t T JV J : 2/. 065. nc3p ,nbp nigpn ,nbp;i r(^p n p^ ICODp ,1CDp PZ. 3 c. IS Dntepn Dntepj Dntep 2 m. |nl2Dpn jntep 2/. Ic. Sg. 3 m. ,23p.:i 'Bp^, jopi '?p\CD'pi Dp^, 23pn epn CDpn epn 3/. epn CDpn CDpn E:pri 2 m. ^tppn sQpn ippn ^:spn 2/. ^P cop^ ep5< CDp Ic. 1 !)tSpi ,!|23p1 nr:spn isp;. nrcDpn T JV )- njjppnnrtspn PZ. 3 m. 3/. a iiDpn =iC3pn iDpn iiDpn 2 m. nriDpn na"'pn njDpn nrspn T : 1 J T JV 1 \ : 2/. ^p;i Dp; ^p:i EDpj Ic. S^r. 2 m. ^P'7 lo^n top ^^PO i^pn ^cpp 2/. > 2 isp..O i3pn ICDp P/. 2 m. f3 n:^^pn nrpn nrsp 2/. 1 at*. l4 copn t:pn,CDlpn CDlCDp ^pn C3pn Dp con^^. act. 23pP CDDp 2R; Diep pass. tfi 208 Paradigm M. Middle-Vowet P6iai. Polel. Hofai. Hif'ii. ^^1p ^^V bp'^n ^'pn ^)'^>[> n^^^P nbp^n n'p^'^n etc. r>k^^p nbpin n^^^pn rn^^ip n^pin ni^-ipn ^n^^ip ^n^p^n ^ni^^pn i^^ip i^pin ib^TH nn^^V Dn^pin 2ni^"'pn jn^blp in^P^n jni^^pn ij^>ip i:^p.in 1^^^'pO ^^i,T b^ip^ ^pi^ b^p^ V^ipri bVi,^n ^pw L ' ' Tpn etc. ^^ipn ^pin ^'PO . -. 1 , i^pin * ) : I '^'pJ? ^!?^p ^pIX "^'P^ i^^ip^ hpv 6^p^ n:^^'fpn T J~ 1 n^Vpjn' nr>^pn ,nj^p.n i^^ipn ^P'ln ib^pn nj^^ipn T J- 1 nj^p,in '"^^pJ? '^".^ipj ^pij ^^P^ p^lp ^PO ^^^^P ' '^'PO wanting 6^1p wanting i^^pn nj^)lp ni^pn bpn ^^lp ^pin L ' " ^^IpD ^N'^D ^^ipp 1 ! ^pio r Verbs (Y^ and V'^) 209 Nif'ftl. W6\ (}"V)- KM (V'W. b\y>^ ^p ^P ^P 5^. 3 m. '^S'P. J?^P '"i'P 3/. 2 m. nibipj etc. P'^'P n^p 2/. ^ni^ipj 'J^^^P ^nS":) Ic. ibip^ 4. 4 PZ. 3 c. 1 DniVipj Dn^p Dfii^P 2 m. l^^P 2/. Ic. -Sfif. 3 m. ' 3/. bipri ^ipn 'p^pn b^pv\ 2 m. ^^ij?n '^'pJ? ^^ipn 2/. ^lp ^'P^ ^ip Ic. t iVip^. nj^pn nj^pn , ;i^^p: nr?ipn PI 3 m. 3/. 1 ^^ipn =)V>pn i^ipn 2 m. n^^pPi n:^)ipn 2/. ^lp: ^ip: Ic. (Sgr. 2 m. '^ipn ^^P ^:) ^^^p" ^^^p 'bv^ 2/. i^fen ''^^'^ ibip PL 2 m. ^ n^!'p 2/. const act pass. s ^Ipi ,^1pn Vip 1 b^p; Tp 71p bip -M 210 ELEMENTS OF HEBREW Paradigm N, Verb Ldmid'Alif (i^"^) Hip&'a. Hif>n. pra. Nlf-H. KH. KDpnn x^ppn 1 ^Sp 1 Sp !Pp; 1 ^W\ ^P| Sg. 3 m. nxQpnn T : 1 - : '"i^^^pn nj^sp T : ) nQp; n{!?p^ i^bpx Dp Ic. 1 ixsp'n^ =IX"'Dp.'' 1!Dp^. i^Pp^ =ibp'^. PL 3 VI. 1 njxippn njxbpri nJxcDp'h T JV 1 T n:Nbpn T jv ) : 3/. M H4 ixspnn ik^bpn ix^pn ^^Ppn WDpn 2 m. n^xspnn n:t into ^ 44. 1. Commutation of letters 41. 3. Compensation 30. Compensative Dfige-f6rte 15. 1. Compound Swa 9. 2. Compoimd *wa, forms of 32. 3. Compound Swa and laryngeals 42. 3. Compound S^wa and laryngeal verbs 75. 3. Compound S'wa and 7 laryngeals... 76. 2. Compound Swa In ';> laryngeals. . .75. 3. Conjimction with verb. 70. Conjunctions 120. 211 212 INDEX Connecting vowels 108. Consecution of accents 24. Consecution of accents, table of 25. Consonant additions in inflection of n"'? verbs 82. 3. y'V verbs 86. 2. r'P verbs 85. 3. Consonantal character of n lost. . .79. 1. Consonantal force of i or ^ retained 44. 5. Consonants liable to rejection 40. Construct, archaic 107. 5. Construct, dual 107. 6. Construct form explained .. 107. 6. B. 3. Construct Infinitive 67. 2. Construct masculine plural 107. 6. Construct sing., stem-changes of. . 109. 3. Construct state 107. Constructs and Prepositions 119. 1. Contracted weak verbs 77. 2. Contraction 36. 7. Contraction of l or ^ 44. 3. Contraction producing long vowel 30. Contractions of nouns w. suflf. 108. 1. R. 1. Contractions with suffixes. . .71. 1. c. N. Conversive, Waw 73. Counts (accents) 22. 1. d. 4>23. 3. Dageg-rfSrte 13. Dages-fSrte after np 54. 2. N. 1. Dages-f6rte and n 42. 2. N. 1. Da^e-f6rte as a Dages-lene.l3. 2. N. 1. Dage-f6rte, characteristic 15. 2. Dage-f6rte, conjunctive 15. 3. Dage-f6rte, emphatic 15. 5. Dage-f6rte, firmative 15. 6. Dage-f6rte, separative 15. 4. Dages-f6rte firmative in nVs 52. 1. d. Dage-f6rte implied 14. 3. nTi ; 42. 1. b., N. Dage-f6rte in IV. cl. nouns, . . 114. R. 2. Dage-f6rte in Pe laryngeals 74. 1. Dage-f6rte, kinds of 15. Dageg-lene ^ 12. 1. Dageg-lene after a silent S^wE 12. 2. Dageg-lene after disj. accents 12. 3. Dages of the article omitted. . .45. 4. R. 1. DageS of Waw conversive. .73. 2. a. (1). DS-rga 22. 2. 22. Declension of nouns ^88-117. Def. written, tone-long vowels 31. 4. N. 1. Defectively written, vowels . . 6. 4. N. 2. Defiected vowel-sounds 7. 3. b. Defiection, occurrence of 36.4. Defiection of preformative vowel 78. 2, b. Deformities, nouns expressing 93. 4. Demonstrative pronoun 52. Denominatives 103. Dentals or sibilants 4. 1. Dependence of noun on noim. . 107. 1, 2. Desire, how expressed 69. 1. b. Determination, how expressed. . .69. 1. b. Diminutive idea expressed 94. 2. Direction expressed 105; 2. a. Disjunctive accent and spirants 12. 3. Disjunctive accents 22. 1 : 23. 2. a. Double consonants (j;";;) 85. Double pliiral 108. 4. Doubling in verb-stem 57. 1. b. Doubling of final consonant in III cl. nouns 94. R. 6. Doubling of laryngeal refused 74. 1. Doubtful vowels 7. 2. N. Dropping of N (H''h) 83. 8. R. 2. Dual niunber 106. 5. Dukes 22. 1. cl. 3; 23. 3. 6, naturally long, where foimd 30. 4. 6, short, where found 29. 4. Elision of N 43, 1. R. 2. Elision of 1 and > 44. 2. Emperors (accents) 22. 1. cl, 1; 23, 3. Emphatic forms w. suffixes. .71. 2. c. (3). Endings char, of abs. and const 107. Endings of noims with suffixes 108. Epenthetic Nfin 71. 2. c. N. 1. Epithets expressed 93. 7. Etymology 45-121. Euphonic change of 6 to fl. . .86, 1. b. N. Euphonic n___(n"*7) 82. 4. N. Euphony of consonants 39-44. Euphony of vowels 29-38. Exhortation, how expressed, . . .69. 1. b. Feminine ending, modifications of, 106, 2. Feminine in verb 60. 2. Feminine noims 115. Feminine noims and suffixes 108. 2. Feminine nouns, declension of 115. Feminine nouns, IV class 115. 3. Feminine nouns from S^, stems , . 89. 4. Feminine noims in n_ 91. 2; 98. R. Feminine nouns. III class 113. 3. Feminine plural 106. 3. Feminine plural affix 107. 6, R. 1. Feminine plural and suffixes 108. 4. Feminine, singular sign 106, 2. Feminines with two short vowels ... 90. 2. Fifth class nouns 114. Final N and j 51. 1. c. Verbal suffixes, table of p. 192. Verbs, classes of 56. Verbs, Paradigms of pp. 194-210. Verbs 'fi laryngeal 74. Verb-stem, formation of 57. 1. Verb-stem, simple 58. Verb-stems classified, view of. .59. Notes. Verb-stems, general view of 59. Vocal Swa 11. 2. R. N. 1. VocaJ wfi, before spirants 12. 2. Vocal Swapretonic, with M606g. . . 18. 2. Vocalization of ) to " 44. 4. Vowel-additions and JV'V verbs 82. 2. Vowel and Swa stand'g together 42. 3. R. 4. Vowel-changes, tables of. 36. b. Vowel-letters 6; 6. 4. N. 1. Vowel-signs 5. Vowel-signs, introduction of. .6. footn. 1. Vowel-so\mds, classification of 7. Vowels 5-11. Vowels, changes of 36. Vowels, euphony of 29-38. Vowels in Hif'il of vy vbs 86. 1. d. Vowels in verbs, variations of 56. Vowels, names of 8. Vowels, naturally long 30. Vowels, pronunciation of 5. Vowels of ?:ai 58. 1, 2. Vowels, tone-long 31. Waw conjunctive, how written 49. 1 , 2, 3, 4. Waw conversive 49. 4. N. 2. Waw conversive and Hifil. .70. 5. b. (1). Waw conversive and tone 21. 3, 4. Waw conversive with n"S verbs. . . 82. 5. b. Waw conv. with V';; verbs 85. 2. R. 4. Waw conv. with Perf. and Impf 71. Waw conversive, the name. . .70. footn. 1. Waw in n"S, V'j? and ""^ verbs.. .70. 3. N. Waw with Impf. strengthened. .70. 2. a. Waw with >r)\ 49. 4. N. 1. Waw with perfect, form of 70. 2. b. Weak consonants 4.2. Weak feminine segolates 115. R. 3. Weak radicals in nouns 89. 2. Weak verb defined 56. 2. Weak verb, the 77-83. of 1 and ^ 44. of K and-> 43. Wish, how expressed 69. 2. b. Words accented on ultima .... 20. footn. Words, how written 3. 1. Words receiving in inflection no endings accented on ultima 20. 3. Y6rah b6n y6m6 22. 2. 26. Y6rah b6n y6m6 and other accents . . 25. 6. yeiv 22. 1. 9. Y'Mv and Mahp^x distinguished 23. 7. Zakef gaddl 22. 1. 6; 24. 5. a. Zakefkaton 22. 1. 5; 24. 4. Zarka 22. 1. 12; 24. 6. 218 INDEX u-class has one tone-long vowel 31. u-class vowels, what they include 35. (i, naturally long, where found 30. 3. a, plural sign of verbs for On . . 122. 5. N. 2. a, pure short, where found 29. 3. Ultimate vowel of J^M 58. 2. Unchangeable vowel in y laryngeal verbs 75. 1. N. 3. Unchangeable vowel-sounds 7. 4. b. Unchangeable vowels 30. 7. N. 2. Uninflected words and accent 20, 3. Union of suffix with imperfect. . .71. 2. c. Union of suffix with perfect 71. 1. c. Verb and sufflates. Paradigm of p. 196. Verb, Paradigm of strong p. 194. Verb, weak 77-104. Verb with suffixes 74. Verbal adjectives in second class. 112. N.5. Verbal form with Waw conversive ..71.3. Verbal forms as interjections 121. 2. Verbal inflections, exceptions in. .36. 3. N. 2. Verbal suffix ti 51. 1. c. Verbal suffixes, table of p. 192. Verbs, classes of 56. Verbs, Paradigms of pp. 194-210. Verbs 'fl laryngeal 74. Verb-stem, formation of 57. 1. Verb-stem, simple 58. Verb-stems classified, view of. .59. Notes. Verb-stems, general view of 59. Vocal Swa 11. 2. R.N. 1. Vocal wa before spirants 12. 2. Vocal Swa pretonic, with Mgegg. . . 18. 2. Vocalization of i to " 44. 4. Vowel-additions and rvh verbs 82. 2. Vowel and Swa stand'g together 42. 3. R. 4. Vowel-changes, tables of. 36. b. Vowel-letters 6; 6. 4. N. 1. Vowel-signs 5. Vowel-signs, introduction of. .6. footn. 1. Vowel-soimds, classification of 7. Vowels 5-11. Vowels, changes of 36. Vowels, euphony of 29-38. Vowels in Hif'il of Y'y vbs 86. 1. d. Vowels in verbs, variations of 56. Vowels, names of 8. Vowels, natiirally long 30. Vowels, pronunciation of 5. Vowels of ?:ai 58. 1, 2. Vowels, tone-long 31. Waw conjxmctive, how written 49. 1 , 2, 3, 4. Waw conversive 49. 4. N. 2. Waw conversive and Hif'il. .70. 5. b. (1). Waw conversive and tone 21. 3, 4. Waw conversive with n"S verbs. . .82. 5. b. Waw conv. with V'j? verbs 85. 2. R. 4. Waw conv. with Perf. and Impf 71. Waw conversive, the name. . . 70. footn. 1. Waw in n"*?, vy and ^"y verbs.. .70. 3. N. Waw with Impf. strengthened . . 70. 2. a. Waw with -.n-" 49. 4. N. 1. Waw with perfect, form of 70. 2. b. Weak consonants 4.2. Weak feminine segolates 115. R. 3. Weak radicals in noims 89. 2. Weak verb defined 56. 2. Weak verb, the 77-83. Weakness of ) and ^ 44. Weakness of n and "> 43. Wish, how expressed 69. 2. b. Words accented on ultima 20. footn. Words, how written 3. 1. Words receiving in infiection no endings accented on ultima 20. 3. Y6rah b6n y6m6 22. 2. 26. YgrJih t>6n y6m5 and other accents . . 25. 6. Ydiv 22. 1. 9. Yeiv and MEhpSx distinguished. . . .23. 7. Zakef gadol 22. 1. 6; 24. 5. a. Zakefk&ton 22. 1. 5; 24. 4. Zarka 22. 1. 12; 24. 6. STAMPED BeS/^^ ATE --Sl'j]^OP 25 CENTS 3^ t / 4911(14 ^ UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA LIBRARY